]>
Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
718e3744 | 1 | % texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
2 | % | |
3 | % Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. | |
4 | \expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi | |
5 | % | |
0ed31928 | 6 | \def\texinfoversion{2005-01-30.17} |
718e3744 | 7 | % |
76b89b4a | 8 | % Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, |
0ed31928 | 9 | % 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software |
76b89b4a | 10 | % Foundation, Inc. |
718e3744 | 11 | % |
12 | % This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or | |
13 | % modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as | |
14 | % published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at | |
15 | % your option) any later version. | |
16 | % | |
17 | % This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be | |
18 | % useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty | |
19 | % of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU | |
20 | % General Public License for more details. | |
21 | % | |
22 | % You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
23 | % along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write | |
24 | % to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, | |
25 | % Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. | |
26 | % | |
76b89b4a | 27 | % As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing |
28 | % a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without | |
29 | % restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.) | |
afc1e2dd | 30 | % |
718e3744 | 31 | % Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug |
32 | % reports; you can get the latest version from: | |
76b89b4a | 33 | % http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or |
718e3744 | 34 | % ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
76b89b4a | 35 | % (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org). |
36 | % The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out | |
718e3744 | 37 | % of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
718e3744 | 38 | % |
39 | % Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a | |
40 | % complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the | |
41 | % problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. | |
42 | % | |
43 | % To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the | |
44 | % texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple | |
45 | % manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: | |
46 | % tex foo.texi | |
47 | % texindex foo.?? | |
48 | % tex foo.texi | |
49 | % tex foo.texi | |
76b89b4a | 50 | % dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. |
51 | % The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. | |
718e3744 | 52 | % Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
53 | % than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. | |
54 | % | |
76b89b4a | 55 | % It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some |
56 | % extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the | |
57 | % full Texinfo distribution. | |
afc1e2dd | 58 | % |
76b89b4a | 59 | % The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. |
60 | ||
718e3744 | 61 | |
62 | \message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} | |
63 | ||
64 | % If in a .fmt file, print the version number | |
65 | % and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because | |
66 | % they might have appeared in the input file name. | |
67 | \everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% | |
68 | \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} | |
69 | ||
76b89b4a | 70 | \message{Basics,} |
71 | \chardef\other=12 | |
72 | ||
73 | % We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. | |
74 | % For @tex, we can use \tabalign. | |
75 | \let\+ = \relax | |
718e3744 | 76 | |
76b89b4a | 77 | % Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. |
718e3744 | 78 | \let\ptexb=\b |
79 | \let\ptexbullet=\bullet | |
80 | \let\ptexc=\c | |
81 | \let\ptexcomma=\, | |
82 | \let\ptexdot=\. | |
83 | \let\ptexdots=\dots | |
84 | \let\ptexend=\end | |
85 | \let\ptexequiv=\equiv | |
86 | \let\ptexexclam=\! | |
76b89b4a | 87 | \let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
88 | \let\ptexgtr=> | |
89 | \let\ptexhat=^ | |
718e3744 | 90 | \let\ptexi=\i |
76b89b4a | 91 | \let\ptexindent=\indent |
76b89b4a | 92 | \let\ptexinsert=\insert |
718e3744 | 93 | \let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
76b89b4a | 94 | \let\ptexless=< |
0ed31928 | 95 | \let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite |
96 | \let\ptexnoindent=\noindent | |
76b89b4a | 97 | \let\ptexplus=+ |
718e3744 | 98 | \let\ptexrbrace=\} |
76b89b4a | 99 | \let\ptexslash=\/ |
718e3744 | 100 | \let\ptexstar=\* |
101 | \let\ptext=\t | |
102 | ||
718e3744 | 103 | % If this character appears in an error message or help string, it |
104 | % starts a new line in the output. | |
105 | \newlinechar = `^^J | |
106 | ||
76b89b4a | 107 | % Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error |
108 | % messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. | |
109 | % | |
110 | \ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined | |
111 | \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. | |
112 | \else | |
113 | \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} | |
114 | \fi | |
115 | ||
718e3744 | 116 | % Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
76b89b4a | 117 | \ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi |
718e3744 | 118 | \ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi |
119 | \ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi | |
76b89b4a | 120 | \ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi |
718e3744 | 121 | \ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi |
122 | \ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi | |
123 | \ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi | |
76b89b4a | 124 | \ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi |
718e3744 | 125 | \ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi |
76b89b4a | 126 | \ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi |
718e3744 | 127 | \ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi |
128 | \ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi | |
129 | \ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi | |
130 | \ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi | |
131 | \ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi | |
132 | \ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi | |
133 | \ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi | |
76b89b4a | 134 | \ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi |
135 | \ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi | |
718e3744 | 136 | % |
137 | \ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi | |
138 | \ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi | |
139 | \ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi | |
140 | \ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi | |
141 | \ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi | |
142 | \ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi | |
143 | \ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi | |
144 | \ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi | |
145 | \ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi | |
146 | \ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi | |
147 | \ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi | |
148 | \ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi | |
149 | % | |
76b89b4a | 150 | \ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi |
151 | \ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi | |
152 | \ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi | |
153 | \ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi | |
154 | \ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi | |
155 | ||
156 | % In some macros, we cannot use the `\? notation---the left quote is | |
157 | % in some cases the escape char. | |
158 | \chardef\colonChar = `\: | |
159 | \chardef\commaChar = `\, | |
160 | \chardef\dotChar = `\. | |
161 | \chardef\exclamChar= `\! | |
162 | \chardef\questChar = `\? | |
163 | \chardef\semiChar = `\; | |
164 | \chardef\underChar = `\_ | |
165 | ||
166 | \chardef\spaceChar = `\ % | |
167 | \chardef\spacecat = 10 | |
168 | \def\spaceisspace{\catcode\spaceChar=\spacecat} | |
718e3744 | 169 | |
170 | % Ignore a token. | |
171 | % | |
172 | \def\gobble#1{} | |
173 | ||
76b89b4a | 174 | % The following is used inside several \edef's. |
175 | \def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} | |
176 | ||
177 | % Hyphenation fixes. | |
178 | \hyphenation{ | |
afc1e2dd | 179 | Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script |
180 | ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps | |
76b89b4a | 181 | data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script |
182 | man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm | |
afc1e2dd | 183 | par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces |
184 | spell-ing spell-ings | |
76b89b4a | 185 | stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space |
186 | wide-spread wrap-around | |
187 | } | |
718e3744 | 188 | |
189 | % Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. | |
76b89b4a | 190 | \newdimen\bindingoffset |
191 | \newdimen\normaloffset | |
718e3744 | 192 | \newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
193 | ||
76b89b4a | 194 | % For a final copy, take out the rectangles |
195 | % that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided | |
196 | % that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). | |
197 | % | |
198 | \def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} | |
199 | ||
200 | % @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should | |
201 | % surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the | |
202 | % change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would | |
203 | % have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main | |
204 | % vertical list for the beginning and end of each change). | |
205 | % | |
206 | \def\|{% | |
207 | % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode. | |
208 | \leavevmode | |
209 | % | |
210 | % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output. | |
211 | \vadjust{% | |
212 | % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current | |
213 | % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record. | |
214 | \vskip-\baselineskip | |
215 | % | |
216 | % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So | |
217 | % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin. | |
218 | \llap{% | |
219 | % | |
220 | % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'. | |
221 | \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt | |
222 | % | |
223 | % This is the space between the bar and the text. | |
224 | \hskip 12pt | |
225 | }% | |
226 | }% | |
227 | } | |
228 | ||
718e3744 | 229 | % Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
230 | % and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, | |
76b89b4a | 231 | % since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make |
232 | % some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log | |
233 | % file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. | |
718e3744 | 234 | % |
235 | \def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% | |
76b89b4a | 236 | \def\loggingall{% |
237 | \tracingstats2 | |
238 | \tracingpages1 | |
239 | \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex | |
240 | \tracingparagraphs1 | |
241 | \tracingoutput1 | |
242 | \tracingmacros2 | |
243 | \tracingrestores1 | |
244 | \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen | |
245 | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging | |
246 | \tracingscantokens1 | |
247 | \tracingifs1 | |
248 | \tracinggroups1 | |
249 | \tracingnesting2 | |
250 | \tracingassigns1 | |
251 | \fi | |
252 | \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex | |
253 | \errorcontextlines16 | |
718e3744 | 254 | }% |
76b89b4a | 255 | |
256 | % add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing | |
257 | % we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. | |
258 | % | |
259 | \def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount | |
260 | \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} | |
261 | \def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount | |
262 | \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} | |
263 | \def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount | |
264 | \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} | |
718e3744 | 265 | |
266 | % For @cropmarks command. | |
267 | % Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. | |
268 | % | |
269 | \newif\ifcropmarks | |
270 | \let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue | |
271 | % | |
272 | % Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. | |
273 | % Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 | |
274 | % | |
275 | \newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines | |
276 | \newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc | |
277 | \newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt | |
278 | \newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in | |
279 | ||
280 | % Main output routine. | |
281 | \chardef\PAGE = 255 | |
282 | \output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} | |
283 | ||
284 | \newbox\headlinebox | |
285 | \newbox\footlinebox | |
286 | ||
287 | % \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents | |
288 | % does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. | |
289 | \def\onepageout#1{% | |
290 | \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi | |
291 | % | |
292 | \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset | |
293 | \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi | |
294 | % | |
295 | % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in | |
296 | % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). | |
297 | \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% | |
298 | \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% | |
299 | % | |
300 | {% | |
301 | % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to | |
302 | % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends | |
303 | % before the \shipout runs. | |
304 | % | |
305 | \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. | |
306 | \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. | |
307 | \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if | |
308 | % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. | |
309 | \shipout\vbox{% | |
76b89b4a | 310 | % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. |
311 | \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi | |
312 | % | |
718e3744 | 313 | \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup |
314 | \hsize = \outerhsize | |
315 | \vskip-\topandbottommargin | |
316 | \vtop to0pt{% | |
317 | \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% | |
318 | \nointerlineskip | |
319 | \line{% | |
320 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
321 | \hfill | |
322 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% | |
323 | }% | |
324 | \vss}% | |
325 | \vskip\topandbottommargin | |
326 | \line\bgroup | |
327 | \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. | |
328 | \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi | |
329 | \vbox\bgroup | |
330 | \fi | |
331 | % | |
332 | \unvbox\headlinebox | |
333 | \pagebody{#1}% | |
334 | \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt | |
335 | % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. | |
336 | % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) | |
337 | % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. | |
338 | \vskip 2\baselineskip | |
339 | \unvbox\footlinebox | |
340 | \fi | |
341 | % | |
342 | \ifcropmarks | |
343 | \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup | |
344 | \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup | |
345 | \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill | |
346 | \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick | |
347 | \vbox to0pt{\vss | |
348 | \line{% | |
349 | \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
350 | \hfill | |
351 | \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% | |
352 | }% | |
353 | \nointerlineskip | |
354 | \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% | |
355 | }% | |
356 | \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause | |
357 | \fi | |
358 | }% end of \shipout\vbox | |
76b89b4a | 359 | }% end of group with \normalturnoffactive |
718e3744 | 360 | \advancepageno |
361 | \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi | |
362 | } | |
363 | ||
364 | \newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen | |
365 | ||
366 | \def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} | |
367 | {\catcode`\@ =11 | |
368 | \gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi | |
369 | % marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) | |
370 | \ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present | |
371 | \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi | |
372 | \dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1 | |
373 | \ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi | |
374 | \ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} | |
375 | } | |
376 | ||
377 | % Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are | |
378 | % offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize | |
379 | % (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) | |
380 | % | |
381 | \def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} | |
382 | \def\nstop{\vbox | |
383 | {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} | |
384 | \def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} | |
385 | \def\nsbot{\vbox | |
386 | {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} | |
387 | ||
388 | % Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of | |
389 | % the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a | |
390 | % macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. | |
391 | % | |
76b89b4a | 392 | \def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} |
393 | \def\parseargusing#1#2{% | |
394 | \def\next{#2}% | |
718e3744 | 395 | \begingroup |
396 | \obeylines | |
76b89b4a | 397 | \spaceisspace |
398 | #1% | |
399 | \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. | |
718e3744 | 400 | } |
401 | ||
718e3744 | 402 | {\obeylines % |
403 | \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% | |
404 | \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. | |
76b89b4a | 405 | \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% |
718e3744 | 406 | }% |
407 | } | |
408 | ||
76b89b4a | 409 | % First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. |
410 | \def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} | |
411 | \def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} | |
718e3744 | 412 | |
76b89b4a | 413 | % Each occurence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. |
414 | % | |
415 | % \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., | |
718e3744 | 416 | % @end itemize @c foo |
76b89b4a | 417 | % This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed |
418 | % by \finishparsearg. | |
419 | % | |
420 | \def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} | |
421 | \def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} | |
422 | \def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% | |
423 | \def\temp{#3}% | |
424 | \ifx\temp\empty | |
425 | % We cannot use \next here, as it holds the macro to run; | |
426 | % thus we reuse \temp. | |
427 | \let\temp\finishparsearg | |
428 | \else | |
429 | \let\temp\argcheckspaces | |
430 | \fi | |
431 | % Put the space token in: | |
432 | \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm | |
718e3744 | 433 | } |
434 | ||
76b89b4a | 435 | % If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so |
436 | % to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. | |
437 | % We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, | |
438 | % just before passing the control to \next. | |
439 | % (Similarily, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is | |
440 | % either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger | |
441 | % that a pair of braces would be stripped. | |
718e3744 | 442 | % |
76b89b4a | 443 | % But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. |
444 | % | |
445 | \def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\next\expandafter{#1}} | |
446 | ||
447 | % \parseargdef\foo{...} | |
448 | % is roughly equivalent to | |
449 | % \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} | |
450 | % \def\Xfoo#1{...} | |
451 | % | |
452 | % Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my | |
453 | % favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03 | |
454 | ||
455 | \def\parseargdef#1{% | |
456 | \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% | |
457 | } | |
458 | \def\doparseargdef#1#2{% | |
459 | \def#2{\parsearg#1}% | |
460 | \def#1##1% | |
461 | } | |
462 | ||
463 | % Several utility definitions with active space: | |
464 | { | |
718e3744 | 465 | \obeyspaces |
76b89b4a | 466 | \gdef\obeyedspace{ } |
467 | ||
468 | % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword | |
469 | % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this | |
470 | % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input | |
471 | % should produce a line of output anyway. | |
472 | % | |
473 | \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} | |
474 | ||
475 | % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces | |
476 | % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the | |
477 | % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). | |
478 | \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} | |
479 | } | |
718e3744 | 480 | |
481 | ||
482 | \def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} | |
483 | ||
76b89b4a | 484 | % Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: |
afc1e2dd | 485 | % |
76b89b4a | 486 | % \envdef\foo{...} |
487 | % \def\Efoo{...} | |
afc1e2dd | 488 | % |
76b89b4a | 489 | % It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the |
490 | % actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also | |
491 | % defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks | |
492 | % whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be | |
493 | % used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. | |
afc1e2dd | 494 | % |
76b89b4a | 495 | % Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they |
496 | % are not treated as enviroments; they don't open a group. (The | |
497 | % implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this | |
498 | % special case.) | |
718e3744 | 499 | |
718e3744 | 500 | |
76b89b4a | 501 | % At runtime, environments start with this: |
502 | \def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} | |
503 | % initialize | |
504 | \let\thisenv\empty | |
718e3744 | 505 | |
76b89b4a | 506 | % ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': |
507 | \long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
508 | \def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} | |
718e3744 | 509 | |
76b89b4a | 510 | % Check whether we're in the right environment: |
511 | \def\checkenv#1{% | |
512 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
513 | \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
718e3744 | 514 | \else |
76b89b4a | 515 | \badenverr |
718e3744 | 516 | \fi |
517 | } | |
518 | ||
76b89b4a | 519 | % Evironment mismatch, #1 expected: |
520 | \def\badenverr{% | |
718e3744 | 521 | \errhelp = \EMsimple |
76b89b4a | 522 | \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, |
523 | not \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
524 | } | |
525 | \def\inenvironment#1{% | |
526 | \ifx#1\empty | |
527 | out of any environment% | |
528 | \else | |
529 | in environment \expandafter\string#1% | |
530 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 531 | } |
532 | ||
76b89b4a | 533 | % @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. |
534 | % But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv | |
718e3744 | 535 | % |
76b89b4a | 536 | \parseargdef\end{% |
537 | \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname | |
538 | \else | |
539 | % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03 | |
540 | \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname | |
541 | \csname E#1\endcsname | |
542 | \endgroup | |
543 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 544 | } |
545 | ||
76b89b4a | 546 | \newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
718e3744 | 547 | |
718e3744 | 548 | |
549 | %% Simple single-character @ commands | |
550 | ||
551 | % @@ prints an @ | |
552 | % Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). | |
553 | \def\@{{\tt\char64}} | |
554 | ||
555 | % This is turned off because it was never documented | |
556 | % and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. | |
557 | %% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and ' | |
558 | %% but suppressing ligatures. | |
559 | %\def\`{{`}} | |
560 | %\def\'{{'}} | |
561 | ||
562 | % Used to generate quoted braces. | |
563 | \def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} | |
564 | \def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} | |
565 | \let\{=\mylbrace | |
566 | \let\}=\myrbrace | |
567 | \begingroup | |
76b89b4a | 568 | % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices, |
569 | % and @{ and @} for the aux file. | |
570 | \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other | |
718e3744 | 571 | \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
76b89b4a | 572 | \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other |
573 | !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]% | |
574 | !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]% | |
575 | !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]% | |
576 | !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]% | |
577 | !endgroup | |
578 | ||
579 | % @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. | |
580 | \let\comma = , | |
718e3744 | 581 | |
582 | % Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent | |
76b89b4a | 583 | % Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. |
718e3744 | 584 | \let\, = \c |
585 | \let\dotaccent = \. | |
586 | \def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} | |
587 | \let\tieaccent = \t | |
588 | \let\ubaraccent = \b | |
589 | \let\udotaccent = \d | |
590 | ||
76b89b4a | 591 | % Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm |
592 | % Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. | |
718e3744 | 593 | \def\questiondown{?`} |
594 | \def\exclamdown{!`} | |
76b89b4a | 595 | \def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}} |
596 | \def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}} | |
718e3744 | 597 | |
598 | % Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. | |
599 | \def\imacro{i} | |
600 | \def\jmacro{j} | |
601 | \def\dotless#1{% | |
602 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
603 | \ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi | |
604 | \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j | |
605 | \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% | |
606 | \fi\fi | |
607 | } | |
608 | ||
76b89b4a | 609 | % The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a |
610 | % period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) | |
afc1e2dd | 611 | % |
612 | \edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } | |
76b89b4a | 613 | |
614 | % @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in | |
615 | % latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most | |
616 | % convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using | |
617 | % the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and | |
618 | % \scriptscriptstyle). | |
afc1e2dd | 619 | % |
76b89b4a | 620 | \def\LaTeX{% |
621 | L\kern-.36em | |
622 | {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% | |
623 | \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}% | |
624 | \kern-.15em | |
625 | \TeX | |
626 | } | |
627 | ||
718e3744 | 628 | % Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
629 | % equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space | |
630 | % at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and | |
631 | % since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the | |
632 | % penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. | |
633 | {\catcode`@ = 11 | |
634 | % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble | |
635 | % if the definition is written into an index file. | |
636 | \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M | |
637 | \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } | |
638 | } | |
639 | ||
640 | % @: forces normal size whitespace following. | |
641 | \def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } | |
642 | ||
643 | % @* forces a line break. | |
644 | \def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} | |
645 | ||
76b89b4a | 646 | % @/ allows a line break. |
647 | \let\/=\allowbreak | |
648 | ||
718e3744 | 649 | % @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
650 | \def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } | |
651 | ||
652 | % @! is an end-of-sentence bang. | |
653 | \def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } | |
654 | ||
655 | % @? is an end-of-sentence query. | |
656 | \def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } | |
657 | ||
658 | % @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the | |
659 | % beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would | |
660 | % produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. | |
661 | \def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} | |
662 | ||
663 | % @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing | |
664 | % it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box | |
665 | % to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for | |
666 | % \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is | |
667 | % max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, | |
668 | % therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and | |
669 | % the text is small, which looks bad. | |
670 | % | |
76b89b4a | 671 | % Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can |
672 | % cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it | |
673 | % does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an | |
674 | % explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The | |
675 | % threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit | |
676 | % percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). | |
677 | % | |
678 | \newbox\groupbox | |
679 | \def\vfilllimit{0.7} | |
680 | % | |
681 | \envdef\group{% | |
682 | \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else | |
718e3744 | 683 | \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp |
684 | \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% | |
685 | \fi | |
76b89b4a | 686 | \startsavinginserts |
718e3744 | 687 | % |
76b89b4a | 688 | \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup |
718e3744 | 689 | % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as |
690 | % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an | |
691 | % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after | |
692 | % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group | |
693 | % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo | |
694 | % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. | |
695 | \comment | |
696 | } | |
697 | % | |
76b89b4a | 698 | % The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts |
699 | % \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) | |
700 | % \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space | |
701 | % above. But it's pretty close. | |
702 | \def\Egroup{% | |
703 | % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group | |
704 | % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. | |
705 | \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. | |
706 | \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth | |
707 | \egroup % End the \vtop. | |
708 | % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. | |
709 | \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox | |
710 | % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). | |
711 | \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal | |
712 | % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big | |
713 | % group, force a page break. | |
714 | \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
715 | \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight | |
716 | \page | |
717 | \fi | |
718 | \fi | |
719 | \box\groupbox | |
720 | \prevdepth = \dimen1 | |
721 | \checkinserts | |
722 | } | |
723 | % | |
718e3744 | 724 | % TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help |
725 | % message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. | |
726 | % | |
727 | \newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% | |
728 | group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% | |
729 | where each line of input produces a line of output.} | |
730 | ||
731 | % @need space-in-mils | |
732 | % forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. | |
733 | ||
734 | \newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in | |
735 | ||
718e3744 | 736 | % Old definition--didn't work. |
76b89b4a | 737 | %\parseargdef\need{\par % |
718e3744 | 738 | %% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
739 | %% if the depth of the box does not fit. | |
740 | %{\baselineskip=0pt% | |
741 | %\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak | |
742 | %\prevdepth=-1000pt | |
743 | %}} | |
744 | ||
76b89b4a | 745 | \parseargdef\need{% |
746 | % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a | |
718e3744 | 747 | % paragraph. |
748 | \par | |
749 | % | |
76b89b4a | 750 | % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. |
751 | \dimen0 = #1\mil | |
752 | \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox | |
753 | \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox | |
754 | \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 | |
755 | % | |
756 | % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the | |
757 | % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. | |
758 | % And a page break here is fine. | |
759 | \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% | |
760 | % | |
761 | % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the | |
762 | % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the | |
763 | % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider | |
764 | % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the | |
765 | % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. | |
766 | % | |
767 | % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the | |
768 | % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in | |
769 | % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which | |
770 | % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing | |
771 | % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an | |
772 | % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real | |
773 | % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. | |
774 | \penalty9999 | |
775 | % | |
776 | % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. | |
777 | \kern -#1\mil | |
778 | % | |
779 | % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. | |
780 | \nobreak | |
781 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 782 | } |
783 | ||
76b89b4a | 784 | % @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). |
718e3744 | 785 | |
786 | \let\br = \par | |
787 | ||
76b89b4a | 788 | % @page forces the start of a new page. |
718e3744 | 789 | % |
790 | \def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
791 | ||
792 | % @exdent text.... | |
793 | % outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin | |
794 | ||
795 | % This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. | |
796 | % That's how much \exdent should take out. | |
797 | \newskip\exdentamount | |
798 | ||
799 | % This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. | |
76b89b4a | 800 | \parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} |
718e3744 | 801 | |
802 | % This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. | |
76b89b4a | 803 | \parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
804 | \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} | |
718e3744 | 805 | |
76b89b4a | 806 | % @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current |
807 | % paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion | |
808 | % class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. | |
809 | % | |
718e3744 | 810 | \newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm |
811 | \def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} | |
76b89b4a | 812 | % |
813 | \def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% | |
814 | \nobreak | |
815 | \kern-\strutdepth | |
816 | \vtop to \strutdepth{% | |
817 | \baselineskip=\strutdepth | |
818 | \vss | |
819 | % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to | |
820 | % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. | |
821 | \ifx#1l% | |
822 | \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% | |
823 | \else | |
824 | \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% | |
825 | \fi | |
826 | \null | |
827 | }% | |
828 | }} | |
829 | \def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} | |
830 | \def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} | |
831 | % | |
832 | % @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} | |
833 | % (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; | |
834 | % else use TEXT for both). | |
835 | % | |
836 | \def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} | |
837 | \def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. | |
838 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
839 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
840 | \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts | |
841 | \def\righttext{#2}% | |
842 | \else | |
843 | \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text | |
844 | \def\righttext{#1}% | |
845 | \fi | |
846 | % | |
847 | \ifodd\pageno | |
848 | \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin | |
849 | \else | |
850 | \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% | |
851 | \fi | |
852 | \temp | |
853 | } | |
718e3744 | 854 | |
855 | % @include file insert text of that file as input. | |
76b89b4a | 856 | % |
857 | \def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} | |
858 | \def\includezzz#1{% | |
859 | \pushthisfilestack | |
718e3744 | 860 | \def\thisfile{#1}% |
76b89b4a | 861 | {% |
862 | \makevalueexpandable | |
863 | \def\temp{\input #1 }% | |
864 | \expandafter | |
865 | }\temp | |
866 | \popthisfilestack | |
867 | } | |
868 | \def\filenamecatcodes{% | |
869 | \catcode`\\=\other | |
870 | \catcode`~=\other | |
871 | \catcode`^=\other | |
872 | \catcode`_=\other | |
873 | \catcode`|=\other | |
874 | \catcode`<=\other | |
875 | \catcode`>=\other | |
876 | \catcode`+=\other | |
877 | \catcode`-=\other | |
878 | } | |
718e3744 | 879 | |
76b89b4a | 880 | \def\pushthisfilestack{% |
881 | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm | |
882 | } | |
883 | \def\pushthisfilestackX{% | |
884 | \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm | |
885 | } | |
886 | \def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% | |
887 | \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% | |
888 | } | |
718e3744 | 889 | |
76b89b4a | 890 | \def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} |
891 | \def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: | |
892 | the stack of filenames is empty.}} | |
718e3744 | 893 | |
76b89b4a | 894 | \def\thisfile{} |
895 | ||
896 | % @center line | |
897 | % outputs that line, centered. | |
898 | % | |
899 | \parseargdef\center{% | |
900 | \ifhmode | |
901 | \let\next\centerH | |
902 | \else | |
903 | \let\next\centerV | |
904 | \fi | |
905 | \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% | |
906 | } | |
907 | \def\centerH#1{% | |
908 | {% | |
909 | \hfil\break | |
910 | \advance\hsize by -\leftskip | |
911 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
912 | \line{#1}% | |
913 | \break | |
914 | }% | |
915 | } | |
916 | \def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}} | |
718e3744 | 917 | |
918 | % @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space | |
919 | ||
76b89b4a | 920 | \parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
718e3744 | 921 | |
922 | % @comment ...line which is ignored... | |
923 | % @c is the same as @comment | |
924 | % @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment | |
925 | ||
926 | \def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% | |
927 | \catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% | |
928 | \commentxxx} | |
929 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} | |
930 | ||
931 | \let\c=\comment | |
932 | ||
933 | % @paragraphindent NCHARS | |
934 | % We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. | |
76b89b4a | 935 | % NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. |
936 | % We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. | |
937 | % | |
718e3744 | 938 | \def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords |
939 | \def\noneword{none} | |
940 | % | |
76b89b4a | 941 | \parseargdef\paragraphindent{% |
718e3744 | 942 | \def\temp{#1}% |
943 | \ifx\temp\asisword | |
944 | \else | |
945 | \ifx\temp\noneword | |
946 | \defaultparindent = 0pt | |
947 | \else | |
948 | \defaultparindent = #1em | |
949 | \fi | |
950 | \fi | |
951 | \parindent = \defaultparindent | |
952 | } | |
953 | ||
76b89b4a | 954 | % @exampleindent NCHARS |
955 | % We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. | |
956 | % It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but | |
957 | % I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. | |
958 | \parseargdef\exampleindent{% | |
959 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
960 | \ifx\temp\asisword | |
961 | \else | |
962 | \ifx\temp\noneword | |
963 | \lispnarrowing = 0pt | |
964 | \else | |
965 | \lispnarrowing = #1em | |
966 | \fi | |
967 | \fi | |
968 | } | |
969 | ||
970 | % @firstparagraphindent WORD | |
971 | % If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph | |
972 | % after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such | |
973 | % paragraphs. | |
718e3744 | 974 | % |
76b89b4a | 975 | % The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling |
976 | % \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. | |
977 | % We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. | |
978 | % By default, we suppress indentation. | |
979 | % | |
980 | \def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
981 | \def\insertword{insert} | |
982 | % | |
983 | \parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% | |
984 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
985 | \ifx\temp\noneword | |
986 | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent | |
987 | \else\ifx\temp\insertword | |
988 | \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax | |
989 | \else | |
990 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
991 | \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% | |
992 | \fi\fi | |
993 | } | |
718e3744 | 994 | |
76b89b4a | 995 | % Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to |
996 | % \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. | |
718e3744 | 997 | % |
76b89b4a | 998 | % We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next |
999 | % paragraph. | |
718e3744 | 1000 | % |
76b89b4a | 1001 | \gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% |
1002 | \gdef\indent{% | |
1003 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1004 | \indent | |
1005 | }% | |
1006 | \gdef\noindent{% | |
1007 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1008 | \noindent | |
1009 | }% | |
1010 | \global\everypar = {% | |
1011 | \kern -\parindent | |
1012 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
1013 | }% | |
1014 | } | |
718e3744 | 1015 | |
76b89b4a | 1016 | \gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% |
1017 | \global \let \indent = \ptexindent | |
1018 | \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent | |
1019 | \global \everypar = {}% | |
1020 | } | |
718e3744 | 1021 | |
718e3744 | 1022 | |
76b89b4a | 1023 | % @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. |
718e3744 | 1024 | % |
76b89b4a | 1025 | \def\asis#1{#1} |
718e3744 | 1026 | |
76b89b4a | 1027 | % @math outputs its argument in math mode. |
1028 | % | |
1029 | % One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean | |
1030 | % an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make | |
1031 | % _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, | |
1032 | % which is what @var uses. | |
1033 | { | |
1034 | \catcode\underChar = \active | |
1035 | \gdef\mathunderscore{% | |
1036 | \catcode\underChar=\active | |
1037 | \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% | |
1038 | } | |
718e3744 | 1039 | } |
76b89b4a | 1040 | % Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character. |
1041 | % FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but | |
1042 | % this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not | |
1043 | % otherwise define @\. | |
718e3744 | 1044 | % |
76b89b4a | 1045 | % The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. |
1046 | \def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} | |
1047 | % | |
1048 | \def\math{% | |
1049 | \tex | |
1050 | \mathunderscore | |
1051 | \let\\ = \mathbackslash | |
1052 | \mathactive | |
1053 | $\finishmath | |
1054 | } | |
1055 | \def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. | |
1056 | ||
1057 | % Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. | |
1058 | % We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument | |
1059 | % to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). | |
1060 | % | |
1061 | { | |
1062 | \catcode`^ = \active | |
1063 | \catcode`< = \active | |
1064 | \catcode`> = \active | |
1065 | \catcode`+ = \active | |
1066 | \gdef\mathactive{% | |
1067 | \let^ = \ptexhat | |
1068 | \let< = \ptexless | |
1069 | \let> = \ptexgtr | |
1070 | \let+ = \ptexplus | |
1071 | } | |
1072 | } | |
1073 | ||
1074 | % @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above. | |
1075 | \def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$} | |
1076 | \def\minus{$-$} | |
1077 | ||
1078 | % @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. | |
1079 | % We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter | |
1080 | % font as three actual period characters. | |
1081 | % | |
1082 | \def\dots{% | |
1083 | \leavevmode | |
1084 | \hbox to 1.5em{% | |
1085 | \hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil | |
1086 | .\hfil.\hfil.% | |
1087 | \hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil | |
1088 | }% | |
1089 | } | |
1090 | ||
1091 | % @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. | |
1092 | % | |
1093 | \def\enddots{% | |
1094 | \dots | |
1095 | \spacefactor=3000 | |
1096 | } | |
1097 | ||
1098 | % @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up | |
1099 | % Texinfo's parsing. | |
afc1e2dd | 1100 | % |
76b89b4a | 1101 | \let\comma = , |
1102 | ||
1103 | % @refill is a no-op. | |
1104 | \let\refill=\relax | |
1105 | ||
1106 | % If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to | |
1107 | % be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. | |
1108 | % This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). | |
1109 | % | |
1110 | \newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. | |
1111 | \let\novalidate = \linksfalse | |
1112 | ||
1113 | % @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. | |
1114 | % So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. | |
1115 | % This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. | |
1116 | \def\setfilename{% | |
1117 | \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. | |
1118 | \iflinks | |
1119 | \tryauxfile | |
1120 | % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. | |
1121 | \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux | |
1122 | \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. | |
1123 | \openindices | |
1124 | \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. | |
1125 | % | |
1126 | % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. | |
1127 | % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. | |
1128 | \openin 1 texinfo.cnf | |
1129 | \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi | |
1130 | \closein 1 | |
1131 | % | |
1132 | \comment % Ignore the actual filename. | |
1133 | } | |
1134 | ||
1135 | % Called from \setfilename. | |
1136 | % | |
1137 | \def\openindices{% | |
718e3744 | 1138 | \newindex{cp}% |
1139 | \newcodeindex{fn}% | |
1140 | \newcodeindex{vr}% | |
1141 | \newcodeindex{tp}% | |
1142 | \newcodeindex{ky}% | |
1143 | \newcodeindex{pg}% | |
1144 | } | |
1145 | ||
1146 | % @bye. | |
1147 | \outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} | |
1148 | ||
1149 | ||
76b89b4a | 1150 | \message{pdf,} |
1151 | % adobe `portable' document format | |
1152 | \newcount\tempnum | |
1153 | \newcount\lnkcount | |
1154 | \newtoks\filename | |
1155 | \newcount\filenamelength | |
1156 | \newcount\pgn | |
1157 | \newtoks\toksA | |
1158 | \newtoks\toksB | |
1159 | \newtoks\toksC | |
1160 | \newtoks\toksD | |
1161 | \newbox\boxA | |
1162 | \newcount\countA | |
1163 | \newif\ifpdf | |
1164 | \newif\ifpdfmakepagedest | |
1165 | ||
afc1e2dd | 1166 | % when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 |
1167 | % can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined, | |
1168 | % borrowed from ifpdf.sty. | |
76b89b4a | 1169 | \ifx\pdfoutput\undefined |
76b89b4a | 1170 | \else |
afc1e2dd | 1171 | \ifx\pdfoutput\relax |
1172 | \else | |
1173 | \ifcase\pdfoutput | |
1174 | \else | |
1175 | \pdftrue | |
1176 | \fi | |
1177 | \fi | |
1178 | \fi | |
1179 | % | |
1180 | \ifpdf | |
76b89b4a | 1181 | \input pdfcolor |
1182 | \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}% | |
1183 | \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% | |
1184 | \def\imagewidth{#2}% | |
1185 | \def\imageheight{#3}% | |
1186 | % without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is | |
1187 | % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) | |
1188 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1189 | \immediate\pdfimage | |
1190 | \else | |
1191 | \immediate\pdfximage | |
1192 | \fi | |
1193 | \ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi | |
1194 | \ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi | |
1195 | \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 | |
1196 | #1.pdf% | |
1197 | \else | |
1198 | {#1.pdf}% | |
1199 | \fi | |
1200 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else | |
1201 | \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage | |
1202 | \fi} | |
1203 | \def\pdfmkdest#1{{% | |
1204 | % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code in a section title | |
1205 | % aren't expanded. | |
1206 | \atdummies | |
1207 | \normalturnoffactive | |
1208 | \pdfdest name{#1} xyz% | |
1209 | }} | |
1210 | \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} | |
1211 | \let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light? | |
1212 | \def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink} | |
1213 | % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines | |
1214 | % come from Petr Olsak | |
1215 | \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% | |
1216 | \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} | |
1217 | \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax | |
1218 | \advance\tempnum by 1 | |
1219 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} | |
1220 | % | |
1221 | % #1 is the section text. #2 is the pdf expression for the number | |
1222 | % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node | |
1223 | % text, which might be empty if this toc entry had no | |
1224 | % corresponding node. #4 is the page number. | |
afc1e2dd | 1225 | % |
76b89b4a | 1226 | \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% |
1227 | % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the | |
1228 | % page number. We could generate a destination for the section | |
1229 | % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't | |
1230 | % seem worthwhile, since most documents are normally structured. | |
1231 | \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}% | |
1232 | \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}\fi | |
1233 | % | |
1234 | \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{#1}% | |
1235 | } | |
1236 | % | |
1237 | \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% | |
1238 | \begingroup | |
1239 | % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks | |
1240 | \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace | |
1241 | \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace | |
1242 | % | |
1243 | % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. | |
1244 | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1245 | \def\thischapnum{##2}% | |
0ed31928 | 1246 | \def\thissecnum{0}% |
1247 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
76b89b4a | 1248 | }% |
1249 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1250 | \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% | |
1251 | \def\thissecnum{##2}% | |
0ed31928 | 1252 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}% |
76b89b4a | 1253 | }% |
1254 | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1255 | \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% | |
1256 | \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% | |
1257 | }% | |
1258 | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1259 | \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% | |
1260 | }% | |
0ed31928 | 1261 | \def\thischapnum{0}% |
1262 | \def\thissecnum{0}% | |
1263 | \def\thissubsecnum{0}% | |
76b89b4a | 1264 | % |
1265 | % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et | |
1266 | % al. a second time, below. | |
1267 | \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1268 | \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1269 | \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1270 | \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1271 | \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% | |
1272 | \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% | |
1273 | \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% | |
1274 | \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% | |
1275 | \input \jobname.toc | |
1276 | % | |
1277 | % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. | |
1278 | % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of | |
1279 | % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. | |
afc1e2dd | 1280 | % |
76b89b4a | 1281 | % We use the node names as the destinations. |
1282 | \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1283 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1284 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1285 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1286 | \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% | |
1287 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1288 | \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero | |
1289 | \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% | |
1290 | % | |
1291 | % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of | |
1292 | % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, | |
1293 | % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from | |
1294 | % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from | |
1295 | % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. | |
afc1e2dd | 1296 | % |
76b89b4a | 1297 | % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to |
1298 | % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right | |
1299 | % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way. | |
1300 | \indexnofonts | |
1301 | \turnoffactive | |
1302 | \input \jobname.toc | |
1303 | \endgroup | |
1304 | } | |
1305 | % | |
1306 | \def\makelinks #1,{% | |
1307 | \def\params{#1}\def\E{END}% | |
1308 | \ifx\params\E | |
1309 | \let\nextmakelinks=\relax | |
1310 | \else | |
1311 | \let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks | |
1312 | \ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi | |
1313 | \picknum{#1}% | |
1314 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} | |
1315 | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}% | |
1316 | \linkcolor #1% | |
1317 | \advance\lnkcount by 1% | |
1318 | \endlink | |
1319 | \fi | |
1320 | \nextmakelinks | |
1321 | } | |
1322 | \def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1} | |
1323 | \def\pn#1{% | |
1324 | \def\p{#1}% | |
1325 | \ifx\p\lbrace | |
1326 | \let\nextpn=\ppn | |
1327 | \else | |
1328 | \let\nextpn=\ppnn | |
1329 | \def\first{#1} | |
1330 | \fi | |
1331 | \nextpn | |
1332 | } | |
1333 | \def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble} | |
1334 | \def\ppnn{\pgn=\first} | |
1335 | \def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,} | |
1336 | \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% | |
1337 | \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax | |
1338 | \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces | |
1339 | \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% | |
1340 | \advance\filenamelength by 1 | |
1341 | \fi | |
1342 | \fi | |
1343 | \nextsp} | |
1344 | \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax} | |
1345 | \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 | |
1346 | \let \startlink \pdfannotlink | |
1347 | \else | |
1348 | \let \startlink \pdfstartlink | |
1349 | \fi | |
1350 | \def\pdfurl#1{% | |
1351 | \begingroup | |
1352 | \normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}% | |
1353 | \makevalueexpandable | |
1354 | \leavevmode\Red | |
1355 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
1356 | user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% | |
1357 | \endgroup} | |
1358 | \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} | |
1359 | \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} | |
1360 | \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} | |
1361 | \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} | |
1362 | \def\maketoks{% | |
1363 | \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax | |
1364 | \ifx\first0\adn0 | |
1365 | \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 | |
1366 | \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 | |
1367 | \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 | |
1368 | \else | |
1369 | \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi | |
1370 | \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else | |
1371 | \let\next=\maketoks | |
1372 | \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} | |
1373 | \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi | |
1374 | \fi | |
1375 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
1376 | \next} | |
1377 | \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% | |
1378 | {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} | |
1379 | \def\pdflink#1{% | |
1380 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} | |
1381 | \linkcolor #1\endlink} | |
1382 | \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} | |
afc1e2dd | 1383 | \else |
1384 | \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble | |
1385 | \let\pdfurl = \gobble | |
1386 | \let\endlink = \relax | |
1387 | \let\linkcolor = \relax | |
1388 | \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax | |
1389 | \fi % \ifx\pdfoutput | |
76b89b4a | 1390 | |
1391 | ||
718e3744 | 1392 | \message{fonts,} |
76b89b4a | 1393 | |
1394 | % Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. | |
1395 | % For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in | |
1396 | % italics, not bold italics. | |
afc1e2dd | 1397 | % |
76b89b4a | 1398 | \def\setfontstyle#1{% |
1399 | \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. | |
1400 | \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font | |
1401 | } | |
1402 | ||
1403 | % Select #1 fonts with the current style. | |
afc1e2dd | 1404 | % |
76b89b4a | 1405 | \def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname} |
1406 | ||
1407 | \def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} | |
1408 | \def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} | |
1409 | \def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} | |
0ed31928 | 1410 | \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} |
76b89b4a | 1411 | \def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} |
718e3744 | 1412 | |
1413 | % Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. | |
76b89b4a | 1414 | % So we set up a \sf. |
718e3744 | 1415 | \newfam\sffam |
76b89b4a | 1416 | \def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} |
718e3744 | 1417 | \let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
1418 | ||
76b89b4a | 1419 | % We don't need math for this font style. |
1420 | \def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} | |
718e3744 | 1421 | |
76b89b4a | 1422 | % Default leading. |
1423 | \newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt | |
1424 | ||
1425 | % Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size | |
1426 | % correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers | |
1427 | % used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. | |
1428 | % | |
1429 | \def\lineskipfactor{.08333} | |
1430 | \def\strutheightpercent{.70833} | |
1431 | \def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} | |
1432 | % | |
1433 | \def\setleading#1{% | |
1434 | \normalbaselineskip = #1\relax | |
1435 | \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip | |
1436 | \normalbaselines | |
1437 | \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% | |
1438 | \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip | |
1439 | depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip | |
1440 | }% | |
1441 | } | |
718e3744 | 1442 | |
1443 | % Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the | |
1444 | % specified font prefix (normally `cm'). | |
1445 | % #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor | |
1446 | \def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} | |
1447 | ||
1448 | % Use cm as the default font prefix. | |
1449 | % To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix | |
1450 | % before you read in texinfo.tex. | |
1451 | \ifx\fontprefix\undefined | |
1452 | \def\fontprefix{cm} | |
1453 | \fi | |
1454 | % Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. | |
1455 | \def\rmshape{r} | |
1456 | \def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold | |
1457 | \def\bfshape{b} | |
1458 | \def\bxshape{bx} | |
1459 | \def\ttshape{tt} | |
1460 | \def\ttbshape{tt} | |
1461 | \def\ttslshape{sltt} | |
1462 | \def\itshape{ti} | |
1463 | \def\itbshape{bxti} | |
1464 | \def\slshape{sl} | |
1465 | \def\slbshape{bxsl} | |
1466 | \def\sfshape{ss} | |
1467 | \def\sfbshape{ss} | |
1468 | \def\scshape{csc} | |
1469 | \def\scbshape{csc} | |
1470 | ||
76b89b4a | 1471 | % Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). |
0ed31928 | 1472 | \def\textnominalsize{11pt} |
1473 | \edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} | |
1474 | \setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1475 | \setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
718e3744 | 1476 | \setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1477 | \setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1478 | \setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1479 | \setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1480 | \setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1481 | \setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} | |
1482 | \font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1483 | \font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep | |
1484 | ||
76b89b4a | 1485 | % A few fonts for @defun names and args. |
1486 | \setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} | |
718e3744 | 1487 | \setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
76b89b4a | 1488 | \setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1489 | \def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf} | |
1490 | ||
1491 | % Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). | |
0ed31928 | 1492 | \def\smallnominalsize{9pt} |
76b89b4a | 1493 | \setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
1494 | \setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000} | |
1495 | \setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900} | |
1496 | \setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000} | |
1497 | \setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000} | |
1498 | \setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000} | |
1499 | \setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900} | |
1500 | \setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900} | |
1501 | \font\smalli=cmmi9 | |
1502 | \font\smallsy=cmsy9 | |
1503 | ||
1504 | % Fonts for small examples (8pt). | |
0ed31928 | 1505 | \def\smallernominalsize{8pt} |
76b89b4a | 1506 | \setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
1507 | \setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000} | |
1508 | \setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800} | |
1509 | \setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000} | |
1510 | \setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000} | |
1511 | \setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000} | |
1512 | \setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800} | |
1513 | \setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800} | |
1514 | \font\smalleri=cmmi8 | |
1515 | \font\smallersy=cmsy8 | |
1516 | ||
1517 | % Fonts for title page (20.4pt): | |
0ed31928 | 1518 | \def\titlenominalsize{20pt} |
718e3744 | 1519 | \setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
1520 | \setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1521 | \setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1522 | \setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} | |
1523 | \setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1524 | \setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} | |
1525 | \let\titlebf=\titlerm | |
1526 | \setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} | |
1527 | \font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 | |
1528 | \font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 | |
1529 | \def\authorrm{\secrm} | |
76b89b4a | 1530 | \def\authortt{\sectt} |
718e3744 | 1531 | |
1532 | % Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). | |
0ed31928 | 1533 | \def\chapnominalsize{17pt} |
718e3744 | 1534 | \setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
1535 | \setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1536 | \setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1537 | \setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} | |
1538 | \setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1539 | \setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} | |
1540 | \let\chapbf=\chaprm | |
1541 | \setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} | |
1542 | \font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 | |
1543 | \font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 | |
1544 | ||
1545 | % Section fonts (14.4pt). | |
0ed31928 | 1546 | \def\secnominalsize{14pt} |
718e3744 | 1547 | \setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
1548 | \setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1549 | \setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1550 | \setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} | |
1551 | \setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1552 | \setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} | |
1553 | \let\secbf\secrm | |
1554 | \setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} | |
1555 | \font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 | |
1556 | \font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 | |
1557 | ||
718e3744 | 1558 | % Subsection fonts (13.15pt). |
0ed31928 | 1559 | \def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} |
718e3744 | 1560 | \setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
1561 | \setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} | |
1562 | \setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} | |
1563 | \setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | |
1564 | \setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} | |
1565 | \setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} | |
1566 | \let\ssecbf\ssecrm | |
76b89b4a | 1567 | \setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315} |
718e3744 | 1568 | \font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
1569 | \font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 | |
76b89b4a | 1570 | |
1571 | % Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt). | |
0ed31928 | 1572 | \def\reducednominalsize{10pt} |
76b89b4a | 1573 | \setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000} |
1574 | \setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000} | |
1575 | \setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000} | |
1576 | \setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000} | |
1577 | \setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000} | |
1578 | \setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000} | |
1579 | \setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000} | |
1580 | \setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000} | |
1581 | \font\reducedi=cmmi10 | |
1582 | \font\reducedsy=cmsy10 | |
718e3744 | 1583 | |
1584 | % In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, | |
1585 | % we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since | |
76b89b4a | 1586 | % texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except |
1587 | % in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and | |
1588 | % \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts). | |
718e3744 | 1589 | % |
1590 | \def\resetmathfonts{% | |
76b89b4a | 1591 | \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy |
1592 | \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf | |
1593 | \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf | |
718e3744 | 1594 | } |
1595 | ||
718e3744 | 1596 | % The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead |
76b89b4a | 1597 | % of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the |
1598 | % current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire | |
1599 | % \tenSTYLE to set the current font. | |
afc1e2dd | 1600 | % |
76b89b4a | 1601 | % Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) |
1602 | % and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in | |
1603 | % the LaTeX logo and acronyms. | |
afc1e2dd | 1604 | % |
76b89b4a | 1605 | % This all needs generalizing, badly. |
afc1e2dd | 1606 | % |
718e3744 | 1607 | \def\textfonts{% |
1608 | \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl | |
1609 | \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc | |
76b89b4a | 1610 | \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
1611 | \let\tenttsl=\textttsl | |
0ed31928 | 1612 | \def\curfontsize{text}% |
76b89b4a | 1613 | \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
1614 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}} | |
718e3744 | 1615 | \def\titlefonts{% |
1616 | \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl | |
1617 | \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc | |
1618 | \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy | |
1619 | \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl | |
0ed31928 | 1620 | \def\curfontsize{title}% |
76b89b4a | 1621 | \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}% |
718e3744 | 1622 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
1623 | \def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} | |
1624 | \def\chapfonts{% | |
1625 | \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl | |
1626 | \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc | |
0ed31928 | 1627 | \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
1628 | \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl | |
1629 | \def\curfontsize{chap}% | |
76b89b4a | 1630 | \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}% |
718e3744 | 1631 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
1632 | \def\secfonts{% | |
1633 | \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl | |
1634 | \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc | |
76b89b4a | 1635 | \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
1636 | \let\tenttsl=\secttsl | |
0ed31928 | 1637 | \def\curfontsize{sec}% |
76b89b4a | 1638 | \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}% |
718e3744 | 1639 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
1640 | \def\subsecfonts{% | |
1641 | \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl | |
1642 | \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc | |
76b89b4a | 1643 | \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
1644 | \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl | |
0ed31928 | 1645 | \def\curfontsize{ssec}% |
76b89b4a | 1646 | \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}% |
718e3744 | 1647 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
76b89b4a | 1648 | \let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts |
1649 | \def\reducedfonts{% | |
1650 | \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl | |
1651 | \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc | |
1652 | \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy | |
1653 | \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl | |
0ed31928 | 1654 | \def\curfontsize{reduced}% |
76b89b4a | 1655 | \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
1656 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
1657 | \def\smallfonts{% | |
1658 | \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl | |
1659 | \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc | |
1660 | \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy | |
1661 | \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl | |
0ed31928 | 1662 | \def\curfontsize{small}% |
76b89b4a | 1663 | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
1664 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}} | |
1665 | \def\smallerfonts{% | |
1666 | \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl | |
1667 | \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc | |
1668 | \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy | |
1669 | \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl | |
0ed31928 | 1670 | \def\curfontsize{smaller}% |
76b89b4a | 1671 | \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}% |
1672 | \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}} | |
1673 | ||
1674 | % Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. | |
1675 | \let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts | |
1676 | ||
1677 | % About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample | |
1678 | % can fit this many characters: | |
1679 | % 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 | |
1680 | % If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: | |
1681 | % 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 | |
1682 | % For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth | |
1683 | % the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. | |
1684 | % | |
1685 | % By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): | |
1686 | % 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 | |
1687 | % | |
1688 | % I wish the USA used A4 paper. | |
1689 | % --karl, 24jan03. | |
1690 | ||
718e3744 | 1691 | |
1692 | % Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. | |
1693 | % | |
76b89b4a | 1694 | \textfonts \rm |
718e3744 | 1695 | |
1696 | % Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. | |
1697 | \def\angleleft{$\langle$} | |
1698 | \def\angleright{$\rangle$} | |
1699 | ||
1700 | % Count depth in font-changes, for error checks | |
1701 | \newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 | |
1702 | ||
1703 | % Fonts for short table of contents. | |
1704 | \setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} | |
76b89b4a | 1705 | \setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1} % no cmb12 |
718e3744 | 1706 | \setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} |
76b89b4a | 1707 | \setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000} |
718e3744 | 1708 | |
1709 | %% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans | |
1710 | %% serif) and @ii for TeX italic | |
1711 | ||
1712 | % \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction | |
1713 | % unless the following character is such as not to need one. | |
76b89b4a | 1714 | \def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else |
1715 | \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi} | |
1716 | \def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1717 | \def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1718 | ||
1719 | % like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl. | |
1720 | % @var is set to this for defun arguments. | |
1721 | \def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
1722 | ||
1723 | % like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want | |
1724 | % ttsl for book titles, do we? | |
1725 | \def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} | |
718e3744 | 1726 | |
1727 | \let\i=\smartitalic | |
afc1e2dd | 1728 | \let\slanted=\smartslanted |
718e3744 | 1729 | \let\var=\smartslanted |
1730 | \let\dfn=\smartslanted | |
1731 | \let\emph=\smartitalic | |
718e3744 | 1732 | |
0ed31928 | 1733 | % @b, explicit bold. |
718e3744 | 1734 | \def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
1735 | \let\strong=\b | |
1736 | ||
0ed31928 | 1737 | % @sansserif, explicit sans. |
1738 | \def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} | |
1739 | ||
718e3744 | 1740 | % We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at |
1741 | % the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the | |
1742 | % group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. | |
1743 | % | |
1744 | \def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} | |
1745 | \def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } | |
1746 | ||
76b89b4a | 1747 | % Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. |
1748 | % Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and | |
1749 | % sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. | |
1750 | % | |
1751 | \catcode`@=11 | |
1752 | \def\frenchspacing{% | |
1753 | \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m | |
1754 | \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m | |
1755 | } | |
1756 | \catcode`@=\other | |
1757 | ||
718e3744 | 1758 | \def\t#1{% |
1759 | {\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% | |
1760 | \null | |
1761 | } | |
718e3744 | 1762 | \def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} |
76b89b4a | 1763 | \setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
1764 | \font\keysy=cmsy9 | |
1765 | \def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% | |
718e3744 | 1766 | \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
1767 | \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt | |
1768 | \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% | |
1769 | \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% | |
1770 | \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} | |
1771 | % The old definition, with no lozenge: | |
1772 | %\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} | |
1773 | \def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} | |
1774 | ||
1775 | % @file, @option are the same as @samp. | |
1776 | \let\file=\samp | |
1777 | \let\option=\samp | |
1778 | ||
1779 | % @code is a modification of @t, | |
1780 | % which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. | |
1781 | \def\tclose#1{% | |
1782 | {% | |
1783 | % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. | |
1784 | \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font | |
1785 | % | |
1786 | % Switch to typewriter. | |
1787 | \tt | |
1788 | % | |
1789 | % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. | |
1790 | \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% | |
1791 | % | |
1792 | % Turn off hyphenation. | |
1793 | \nohyphenation | |
1794 | % | |
1795 | \rawbackslash | |
1796 | \frenchspacing | |
1797 | #1% | |
1798 | }% | |
1799 | \null | |
1800 | } | |
1801 | ||
76b89b4a | 1802 | % We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. |
718e3744 | 1803 | % Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
1804 | % in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. | |
1805 | ||
1806 | % Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control | |
1807 | % both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. | |
1808 | % We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) | |
1809 | % and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. | |
1810 | % -- rms. | |
1811 | { | |
1812 | \catcode`\-=\active | |
1813 | \catcode`\_=\active | |
1814 | % | |
1815 | \global\def\code{\begingroup | |
1816 | \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash | |
1817 | \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder | |
1818 | \codex | |
1819 | } | |
718e3744 | 1820 | } |
1821 | ||
1822 | \def\realdash{-} | |
1823 | \def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} | |
76b89b4a | 1824 | \def\codeunder{% |
1825 | % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ | |
1826 | % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) | |
1827 | % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us | |
1828 | % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. | |
1829 | \ifusingtt{\ifmmode | |
1830 | \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. | |
1831 | \else\normalunderscore \fi | |
1832 | \discretionary{}{}{}}% | |
1833 | {\_}% | |
1834 | } | |
718e3744 | 1835 | \def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
1836 | ||
718e3744 | 1837 | % @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
1838 | % then @kbd has no effect. | |
1839 | ||
1840 | % @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), | |
1841 | % `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), | |
1842 | % or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). | |
76b89b4a | 1843 | \parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% |
718e3744 | 1844 | \def\arg{#1}% |
1845 | \ifx\arg\worddistinct | |
1846 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% | |
1847 | \else\ifx\arg\wordexample | |
1848 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | |
1849 | \else\ifx\arg\wordcode | |
1850 | \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% | |
76b89b4a | 1851 | \else |
1852 | \errhelp = \EMsimple | |
1853 | \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\arg'}% | |
718e3744 | 1854 | \fi\fi\fi |
1855 | } | |
1856 | \def\worddistinct{distinct} | |
1857 | \def\wordexample{example} | |
1858 | \def\wordcode{code} | |
1859 | ||
76b89b4a | 1860 | % Default is `distinct.' |
1861 | \kbdinputstyle distinct | |
718e3744 | 1862 | |
1863 | \def\xkey{\key} | |
1864 | \def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% | |
1865 | \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% | |
1866 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi | |
1867 | \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} | |
1868 | ||
afc1e2dd | 1869 | % For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
1870 | \let\indicateurl=\code | |
718e3744 | 1871 | \let\env=\code |
1872 | \let\command=\code | |
1873 | ||
1874 | % @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated) | |
1875 | % second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third | |
1876 | % arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url | |
1877 | % itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in | |
1878 | % a hypertex \special here. | |
1879 | % | |
1880 | \def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish} | |
76b89b4a | 1881 | \def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup |
1882 | \unsepspaces | |
1883 | \pdfurl{#1}% | |
718e3744 | 1884 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% |
1885 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
1886 | \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that | |
1887 | \else | |
1888 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
1889 | \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt | |
76b89b4a | 1890 | \ifpdf |
1891 | \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it | |
1892 | \else | |
1893 | \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url | |
1894 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 1895 | \else |
1896 | \code{#1}% only url given, so show it | |
1897 | \fi | |
1898 | \fi | |
76b89b4a | 1899 | \endlink |
1900 | \endgroup} | |
718e3744 | 1901 | |
afc1e2dd | 1902 | % @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. |
1903 | % | |
1904 | \let\url=\uref | |
1905 | ||
76b89b4a | 1906 | % rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
1907 | % So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. | |
1908 | % | |
718e3744 | 1909 | %\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
76b89b4a | 1910 | \ifpdf |
1911 | \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} | |
1912 | \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup | |
1913 | \unsepspaces | |
1914 | \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% | |
1915 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% | |
1916 | \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi | |
1917 | \endlink | |
1918 | \endgroup} | |
1919 | \else | |
1920 | \let\email=\uref | |
1921 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 1922 | |
1923 | % Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the | |
1924 | % Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and | |
1925 | % shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have | |
1926 | % this property, we can check that font parameter. | |
1927 | % | |
1928 | \def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } | |
1929 | ||
1930 | % Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the | |
1931 | % argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. | |
1932 | % | |
1933 | \def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} | |
1934 | ||
1935 | \def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} | |
1936 | ||
1937 | % @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', | |
1938 | % and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for | |
1939 | % Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. | |
1940 | %\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} | |
1941 | ||
1942 | % Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. | |
1943 | \def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font | |
1944 | \def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font | |
1945 | \def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font | |
1946 | ||
afc1e2dd | 1947 | % @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. |
1948 | % We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for | |
1949 | % all-uppercase. | |
1950 | % | |
76b89b4a | 1951 | \def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} |
1952 | \def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
1953 | {\selectfonts\lsize #1}% | |
1954 | \def\temp{#2}% | |
1955 | \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
1956 | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
1957 | \fi | |
1958 | } | |
718e3744 | 1959 | |
afc1e2dd | 1960 | % @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. |
1961 | % No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. | |
76b89b4a | 1962 | % |
afc1e2dd | 1963 | \def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} |
1964 | \def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% | |
1965 | {\frenchspacing #1}% | |
1966 | \def\temp{#2}% | |
1967 | \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
1968 | \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% | |
1969 | \fi | |
1970 | } | |
1971 | ||
1972 | % @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. | |
1973 | % | |
718e3744 | 1974 | \def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
1975 | ||
0ed31928 | 1976 | % @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. |
1977 | % We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik | |
1978 | % Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and | |
1979 | % "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). | |
1980 | % It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. | |
1981 | % | |
1982 | % Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore | |
1983 | % that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular | |
1984 | % font height. | |
1985 | % | |
1986 | % feymr - regular | |
1987 | % feymo - slanted | |
1988 | % feybr - bold | |
1989 | % feybo - bold slanted | |
1990 | % | |
1991 | % There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. | |
1992 | % A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. | |
1993 | % Hmm. | |
1994 | % | |
1995 | % Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? | |
1996 | % Hope not. | |
1997 | % | |
1998 | % | |
1999 | \def\euro{{\eurofont e}} | |
2000 | \def\eurofont{% | |
2001 | % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in | |
2002 | % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that | |
2003 | % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the | |
2004 | % font installed. | |
2005 | % | |
2006 | % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale | |
2007 | % that to the current nominal size. | |
2008 | % | |
2009 | % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but | |
2010 | % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. | |
2011 | % | |
2012 | \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% | |
2013 | % | |
2014 | \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename | |
2015 | % bold: | |
2016 | \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize | |
2017 | \else | |
2018 | % regular: | |
2019 | \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize | |
2020 | \fi | |
2021 | \thiseurofont | |
2022 | } | |
2023 | ||
76b89b4a | 2024 | % @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really |
2025 | % be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. | |
2026 | % Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. | |
2027 | % | |
2028 | \def\registeredsymbol{% | |
2029 | $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}% | |
2030 | \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% | |
2031 | }$% | |
2032 | } | |
2033 | ||
afc1e2dd | 2034 | % Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: |
2035 | % Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 | |
2036 | % so we'll define it if necessary. | |
2037 | % | |
2038 | \ifx\Orb\undefined | |
2039 | \def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} | |
2040 | \fi | |
2041 | ||
718e3744 | 2042 | |
2043 | \message{page headings,} | |
2044 | ||
2045 | \newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in | |
2046 | \newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc | |
2047 | ||
2048 | % First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. | |
2049 | \newif\ifseenauthor | |
2050 | \newif\iffinishedtitlepage | |
2051 | ||
2052 | % Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the | |
2053 | % user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. | |
2054 | % | |
2055 | \newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2056 | \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2057 | \newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2058 | \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue | |
2059 | ||
76b89b4a | 2060 | \parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
718e3744 | 2061 | \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
2062 | ||
76b89b4a | 2063 | \envdef\titlepage{% |
2064 | % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. | |
2065 | \begingroup | |
2066 | \parindent=0pt \textfonts | |
2067 | % Leave some space at the very top of the page. | |
2068 | \vglue\titlepagetopglue | |
2069 | % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. | |
2070 | \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2071 | % | |
2072 | % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space | |
2073 | % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. | |
2074 | \let\oldpage = \page | |
2075 | \def\page{% | |
718e3744 | 2076 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
76b89b4a | 2077 | \finishtitlepage |
718e3744 | 2078 | \fi |
718e3744 | 2079 | \let\page = \oldpage |
76b89b4a | 2080 | \page |
2081 | \null | |
2082 | }% | |
718e3744 | 2083 | } |
2084 | ||
2085 | \def\Etitlepage{% | |
76b89b4a | 2086 | \iffinishedtitlepage\else |
2087 | \finishtitlepage | |
2088 | \fi | |
2089 | % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, | |
2090 | % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. | |
2091 | % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page | |
2092 | % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. | |
2093 | \oldpage | |
2094 | \endgroup | |
2095 | % | |
2096 | % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are | |
2097 | % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. | |
2098 | \HEADINGSon | |
2099 | % | |
2100 | % If they want short, they certainly want long too. | |
2101 | \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2102 | \shortcontents | |
2103 | \contents | |
2104 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2105 | \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2106 | \fi | |
2107 | % | |
2108 | \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage | |
2109 | \contents | |
2110 | \global\let\contents = \relax | |
2111 | \global\let\shortcontents = \relax | |
2112 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 2113 | } |
2114 | ||
2115 | \def\finishtitlepage{% | |
76b89b4a | 2116 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize |
2117 | \vskip\titlepagebottomglue | |
2118 | \finishedtitlepagetrue | |
2119 | } | |
2120 | ||
2121 | %%% Macros to be used within @titlepage: | |
2122 | ||
2123 | \let\subtitlerm=\tenrm | |
2124 | \def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} | |
2125 | ||
2126 | \def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines | |
2127 | \let\tt=\authortt} | |
2128 | ||
2129 | \parseargdef\title{% | |
2130 | \checkenv\titlepage | |
2131 | \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1} | |
2132 | % print a rule at the page bottom also. | |
2133 | \finishedtitlepagefalse | |
2134 | \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt | |
2135 | } | |
2136 | ||
2137 | \parseargdef\subtitle{% | |
2138 | \checkenv\titlepage | |
2139 | {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% | |
2140 | } | |
2141 | ||
2142 | % @author should come last, but may come many times. | |
2143 | % It can also be used inside @quotation. | |
afc1e2dd | 2144 | % |
76b89b4a | 2145 | \parseargdef\author{% |
2146 | \def\temp{\quotation}% | |
2147 | \ifx\thisenv\temp | |
2148 | \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. | |
2149 | \else | |
2150 | \checkenv\titlepage | |
2151 | \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi | |
2152 | {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}% | |
2153 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 2154 | } |
2155 | ||
76b89b4a | 2156 | |
718e3744 | 2157 | %%% Set up page headings and footings. |
2158 | ||
2159 | \let\thispage=\folio | |
2160 | ||
2161 | \newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages | |
2162 | \newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages | |
2163 | \newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages | |
2164 | \newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages | |
2165 | ||
76b89b4a | 2166 | % Now make TeX use those variables |
718e3744 | 2167 | \headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
2168 | \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} | |
2169 | \footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline | |
2170 | \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} | |
2171 | \let\HEADINGShook=\relax | |
2172 | ||
2173 | % Commands to set those variables. | |
2174 | % For example, this is what @headings on does | |
2175 | % @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter | |
2176 | % @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle | |
2177 | % @evenfooting @thisfile|| | |
2178 | % @oddfooting ||@thisfile | |
2179 | ||
718e3744 | 2180 | |
76b89b4a | 2181 | \def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} |
2182 | \def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
2183 | \def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
718e3744 | 2184 | \global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
2185 | ||
76b89b4a | 2186 | \def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} |
2187 | \def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
2188 | \def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
718e3744 | 2189 | \global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
2190 | ||
76b89b4a | 2191 | \parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% |
718e3744 | 2192 | |
76b89b4a | 2193 | \def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} |
2194 | \def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
2195 | \def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
718e3744 | 2196 | \global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
2197 | ||
76b89b4a | 2198 | \def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} |
2199 | \def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} | |
2200 | \def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% | |
718e3744 | 2201 | \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
2202 | % | |
2203 | % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume | |
2204 | % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. | |
2205 | \global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip | |
2206 | \global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip | |
2207 | } | |
2208 | ||
76b89b4a | 2209 | \parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
2210 | ||
718e3744 | 2211 | |
2212 | % @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. | |
2213 | % @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. | |
2214 | % @headings off turns them off. | |
2215 | % @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. | |
2216 | % @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2217 | % @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. | |
2218 | % @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. | |
2219 | % By default, they are off at the start of a document, | |
2220 | % and turned `on' after @end titlepage. | |
2221 | ||
2222 | \def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} | |
2223 | ||
76b89b4a | 2224 | \def\HEADINGSoff{% |
718e3744 | 2225 | \global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
2226 | \global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}} | |
2227 | \HEADINGSoff | |
2228 | % When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. | |
2229 | % For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, | |
2230 | % chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document | |
2231 | % title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top | |
2232 | % edge of all pages. | |
76b89b4a | 2233 | \def\HEADINGSdouble{% |
718e3744 | 2234 | \global\pageno=1 |
2235 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2236 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2237 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2238 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2239 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2240 | } | |
2241 | \let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2242 | ||
2243 | % For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, | |
2244 | % page number on top right. | |
76b89b4a | 2245 | \def\HEADINGSsingle{% |
718e3744 | 2246 | \global\pageno=1 |
2247 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2248 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2249 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2250 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2251 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2252 | } | |
2253 | \def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} | |
2254 | ||
2255 | \def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} | |
2256 | \let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter | |
2257 | \def\HEADINGSdoublex{% | |
2258 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2259 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2260 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} | |
2261 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2262 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage | |
2263 | } | |
2264 | ||
2265 | \def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} | |
2266 | \def\HEADINGSsinglex{% | |
2267 | \global\evenfootline={\hfil} | |
2268 | \global\oddfootline={\hfil} | |
2269 | \global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2270 | \global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} | |
2271 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
2272 | } | |
2273 | ||
2274 | % Subroutines used in generating headings | |
76b89b4a | 2275 | % This produces Day Month Year style of output. |
2276 | % Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set | |
2277 | % up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). | |
2278 | \ifx\today\undefined | |
718e3744 | 2279 | \def\today{% |
2280 | \number\day\space | |
2281 | \ifcase\month | |
2282 | \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr | |
2283 | \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug | |
2284 | \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec | |
2285 | \fi | |
2286 | \space\number\year} | |
76b89b4a | 2287 | \fi |
718e3744 | 2288 | |
2289 | % @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. | |
2290 | % It generates no output of its own. | |
2291 | \def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} | |
76b89b4a | 2292 | \def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} |
718e3744 | 2293 | |
2294 | ||
2295 | \message{tables,} | |
76b89b4a | 2296 | % Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). |
718e3744 | 2297 | |
2298 | % default indentation of table text | |
2299 | \newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in | |
2300 | % default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text | |
2301 | \newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in | |
2302 | % margin between end of table item and start of table text. | |
2303 | \newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in | |
2304 | ||
2305 | % used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin | |
2306 | \newdimen\itemmax | |
2307 | ||
76b89b4a | 2308 | % Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with |
718e3744 | 2309 | % these defs. |
2310 | % They also define \itemindex | |
2311 | % to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). | |
2312 | ||
2313 | \newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip | |
2314 | ||
2315 | \def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} | |
2316 | ||
2317 | \def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2318 | \def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} | |
2319 | ||
718e3744 | 2320 | \def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % |
2321 | \advance\hsize by -\rightskip | |
2322 | \advance\hsize by -\tableindent | |
76b89b4a | 2323 | \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% |
718e3744 | 2324 | \itemindex{#1}% |
2325 | \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. | |
2326 | % | |
2327 | % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line | |
2328 | % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that | |
2329 | % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next | |
2330 | % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the | |
2331 | % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. | |
2332 | \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax | |
2333 | % | |
2334 | % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, | |
2335 | % but leave it ragged-right. | |
2336 | \begingroup | |
2337 | \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent | |
2338 | \advance\hsize by\tableindent | |
2339 | \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil | |
2340 | \leavevmode\unhbox0\par | |
2341 | \endgroup | |
2342 | % | |
2343 | % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the | |
2344 | % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. | |
2345 | \nobreak \vskip-\parskip | |
2346 | % | |
afc1e2dd | 2347 | % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if |
2348 | % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no | |
2349 | % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would | |
2350 | % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this | |
2351 | % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert | |
2352 | % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. | |
2353 | % | |
76b89b4a | 2354 | \penalty 10001 |
718e3744 | 2355 | \endgroup |
2356 | \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse | |
2357 | \else | |
2358 | % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the | |
2359 | % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. | |
2360 | \noindent | |
2361 | % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in | |
2362 | % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and | |
2363 | % eventually be printed. | |
2364 | \nobreak\kern-\tableindent | |
2365 | \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 | |
2366 | \unhbox0 | |
2367 | \nobreak\kern\dimen0 | |
2368 | \endgroup | |
2369 | \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue | |
2370 | \fi | |
2371 | } | |
2372 | ||
76b89b4a | 2373 | \def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} |
2374 | \def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} | |
718e3744 | 2375 | |
2376 | % @table, @ftable, @vtable. | |
76b89b4a | 2377 | \envdef\table{% |
2378 | \let\itemindex\gobble | |
0ed31928 | 2379 | \tablecheck{table}% |
76b89b4a | 2380 | } |
2381 | \envdef\ftable{% | |
2382 | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% | |
0ed31928 | 2383 | \tablecheck{ftable}% |
76b89b4a | 2384 | } |
2385 | \envdef\vtable{% | |
2386 | \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% | |
0ed31928 | 2387 | \tablecheck{vtable}% |
2388 | } | |
2389 | \def\tablecheck#1{% | |
2390 | \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active | |
2391 | \endgroup | |
2392 | \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is | |
2393 | that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% | |
2394 | \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% | |
2395 | \else | |
2396 | \let\next\tablex | |
2397 | \fi | |
2398 | \next | |
76b89b4a | 2399 | } |
2400 | \def\tablex#1{% | |
2401 | \def\itemindicate{#1}% | |
2402 | \parsearg\tabley | |
718e3744 | 2403 | } |
76b89b4a | 2404 | \def\tabley#1{% |
2405 | {% | |
2406 | \makevalueexpandable | |
2407 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% | |
2408 | \expandafter | |
2409 | }\temp \endtablez | |
2410 | } | |
2411 | \def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% | |
2412 | \aboveenvbreak | |
2413 | \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi | |
2414 | \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi | |
2415 | \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi | |
2416 | \itemmax=\tableindent | |
2417 | \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
2418 | \advance \leftskip by \tableindent | |
2419 | \exdentamount=\tableindent | |
2420 | \parindent = 0pt | |
2421 | \parskip = \smallskipamount | |
2422 | \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
2423 | \let\item = \internalBitem | |
2424 | \let\itemx = \internalBitemx | |
2425 | } | |
2426 | \def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} | |
2427 | \let\Eftable\Etable | |
2428 | \let\Evtable\Etable | |
2429 | \let\Eitemize\Etable | |
2430 | \let\Eenumerate\Etable | |
718e3744 | 2431 | |
2432 | % This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize | |
2433 | ||
2434 | \newcount \itemno | |
2435 | ||
76b89b4a | 2436 | \envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} |
718e3744 | 2437 | |
76b89b4a | 2438 | \def\doitemize#1{% |
2439 | \aboveenvbreak | |
2440 | \itemmax=\itemindent | |
2441 | \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin | |
2442 | \advance\leftskip by \itemindent | |
2443 | \exdentamount=\itemindent | |
2444 | \parindent=0pt | |
2445 | \parskip=\smallskipamount | |
2446 | \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi | |
2447 | \def\itemcontents{#1}% | |
2448 | % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. | |
2449 | \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi | |
2450 | \let\item=\itemizeitem | |
718e3744 | 2451 | } |
2452 | ||
76b89b4a | 2453 | % Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. |
2454 | % | |
2455 | \def\itemizeitem{% | |
2456 | \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations | |
2457 | {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break | |
2458 | {% | |
2459 | % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a | |
2460 | % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have | |
2461 | % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero | |
2462 | % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the | |
2463 | % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there | |
2464 | % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much | |
2465 | % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least | |
2466 | % that's the theory. | |
2467 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi | |
2468 | \noindent | |
2469 | \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% | |
2470 | \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item. | |
2471 | \flushcr | |
2472 | } | |
718e3744 | 2473 | |
2474 | % \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in | |
2475 | % TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. | |
2476 | % | |
2477 | \def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% | |
2478 | ||
2479 | % Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, | |
2480 | % or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No | |
2481 | % argument is the same as `1'. | |
2482 | % | |
76b89b4a | 2483 | \envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} |
718e3744 | 2484 | \def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% |
718e3744 | 2485 | % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. |
2486 | \def\thearg{#1}% | |
2487 | \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi | |
2488 | % | |
2489 | % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a | |
2490 | % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. | |
2491 | % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. | |
2492 | % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at | |
2493 | % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) | |
2494 | \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark | |
2495 | \ifx\rest\empty | |
2496 | % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. | |
2497 | % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. | |
2498 | % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and | |
2499 | % not equal to itself. | |
2500 | % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. | |
2501 | % | |
2502 | % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from | |
2503 | % continuing to look for a <number>. | |
2504 | % | |
2505 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax | |
2506 | \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) | |
2507 | \else | |
2508 | % It's a letter. | |
2509 | \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax | |
2510 | \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter | |
2511 | \else | |
2512 | \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter | |
2513 | \fi | |
2514 | \fi | |
2515 | \else | |
2516 | % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. | |
2517 | \numericenumerate | |
2518 | \fi | |
2519 | } | |
2520 | ||
2521 | % An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is | |
2522 | % given in \thearg. | |
2523 | % | |
2524 | \def\numericenumerate{% | |
2525 | \itemno = \thearg | |
2526 | \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% | |
2527 | } | |
2528 | ||
2529 | % The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
2530 | \def\lowercaseenumerate{% | |
2531 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
2532 | \startenumeration{% | |
2533 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
2534 | \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
2535 | \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
2536 | alphabet}% | |
2537 | \fi | |
2538 | \char\lccode\itemno | |
2539 | }% | |
2540 | } | |
2541 | ||
2542 | % The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. | |
2543 | \def\uppercaseenumerate{% | |
2544 | \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg | |
2545 | \startenumeration{% | |
2546 | % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. | |
2547 | \ifnum\itemno=0 | |
2548 | \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger | |
2549 | alphabet} | |
2550 | \fi | |
2551 | \char\uccode\itemno | |
2552 | }% | |
2553 | } | |
2554 | ||
76b89b4a | 2555 | % Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the |
718e3744 | 2556 | % common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in |
2557 | % \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. | |
2558 | % | |
2559 | \def\startenumeration#1{% | |
2560 | \advance\itemno by -1 | |
76b89b4a | 2561 | \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr |
718e3744 | 2562 | } |
2563 | ||
2564 | % @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg | |
2565 | % to @enumerate. | |
2566 | % | |
2567 | \def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} | |
2568 | \def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} | |
2569 | \def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
2570 | \def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} | |
2571 | ||
718e3744 | 2572 | |
2573 | % @multitable macros | |
2574 | % Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 | |
2575 | % | |
2576 | % @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. | |
2577 | % Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width | |
2578 | % can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, | |
2579 | % or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. | |
2580 | ||
2581 | % Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. | |
2582 | ||
2583 | % To make preamble: | |
2584 | % | |
2585 | % Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: | |
2586 | % @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 | |
2587 | % @item ... | |
2588 | % | |
2589 | % Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total | |
2590 | % current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many | |
2591 | % columns as desired. | |
2592 | ||
2593 | ||
2594 | % Or use a template: | |
2595 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
2596 | % @item ... | |
2597 | % using the widest term desired in each column. | |
718e3744 | 2598 | |
2599 | % Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column | |
2600 | % starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's | |
2601 | % with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, | |
2602 | % ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. | |
2603 | ||
76b89b4a | 2604 | % @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt |
2605 | % if they are. | |
718e3744 | 2606 | |
2607 | % Sample multitable: | |
2608 | ||
2609 | % @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} | |
2610 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col | |
2611 | % @item | |
2612 | % first col stuff | |
2613 | % @tab | |
2614 | % second col stuff | |
2615 | % @tab | |
2616 | % third col | |
2617 | % @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff | |
2618 | % @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. | |
2619 | % | |
2620 | % They will wrap at the width determined by the template. | |
2621 | % @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. | |
2622 | % @end multitable | |
2623 | ||
2624 | % Default dimensions may be reset by user. | |
2625 | % @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. | |
2626 | % @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. | |
2627 | % @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. | |
2628 | % @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline | |
2629 | % to baseline. | |
2630 | % 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. | |
2631 | % | |
2632 | \newskip\multitableparskip | |
2633 | \newskip\multitableparindent | |
2634 | \newdimen\multitablecolspace | |
2635 | \newskip\multitablelinespace | |
2636 | \multitableparskip=0pt | |
2637 | \multitableparindent=6pt | |
2638 | \multitablecolspace=12pt | |
2639 | \multitablelinespace=0pt | |
2640 | ||
2641 | % Macros used to set up halign preamble: | |
2642 | % | |
2643 | \let\endsetuptable\relax | |
2644 | \def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} | |
2645 | \let\columnfractions\relax | |
2646 | \def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} | |
2647 | \newif\ifsetpercent | |
2648 | ||
76b89b4a | 2649 | % #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might |
2650 | % be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. | |
afc1e2dd | 2651 | % |
76b89b4a | 2652 | \def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% |
718e3744 | 2653 | \global\advance\colcount by 1 |
76b89b4a | 2654 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% |
718e3744 | 2655 | \setuptable |
2656 | } | |
2657 | ||
2658 | \newcount\colcount | |
2659 | \def\setuptable#1{% | |
2660 | \def\firstarg{#1}% | |
2661 | \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable | |
2662 | \let\go = \relax | |
2663 | \else | |
2664 | \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions | |
2665 | \global\setpercenttrue | |
2666 | \else | |
2667 | \ifsetpercent | |
2668 | \let\go\pickupwholefraction | |
2669 | \else | |
2670 | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
76b89b4a | 2671 | \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a |
2672 | % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. | |
718e3744 | 2673 | \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
2674 | \fi | |
2675 | \fi | |
2676 | \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction | |
2677 | % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so | |
2678 | % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. | |
2679 | \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% | |
2680 | \else | |
2681 | \let\go = \setuptable | |
2682 | \fi% | |
2683 | \fi | |
2684 | \go | |
2685 | } | |
2686 | ||
76b89b4a | 2687 | % multitable-only commands. |
2688 | % | |
2689 | % @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. | |
2690 | % Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group | |
2691 | % of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab. | |
2692 | \def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}% | |
2693 | % | |
2694 | % A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template | |
2695 | % line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until | |
2696 | % we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again. | |
2697 | % --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. | |
2698 | \def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% | |
718e3744 | 2699 | |
2700 | % @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: | |
2701 | % | |
76b89b4a | 2702 | \newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. |
2703 | % | |
2704 | \envdef\multitable{% | |
718e3744 | 2705 | \vskip\parskip |
76b89b4a | 2706 | \startsavinginserts |
2707 | % | |
2708 | % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. | |
afc1e2dd | 2709 | % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries |
2710 | % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka | |
2711 | % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. | |
2712 | \def\item{\crcr}% | |
76b89b4a | 2713 | % |
718e3744 | 2714 | \tolerance=9500 |
2715 | \hbadness=9500 | |
2716 | \setmultitablespacing | |
2717 | \parskip=\multitableparskip | |
2718 | \parindent=\multitableparindent | |
2719 | \overfullrule=0pt | |
2720 | \global\colcount=0 | |
718e3744 | 2721 | % |
76b89b4a | 2722 | \everycr = {% |
2723 | \noalign{% | |
2724 | \global\everytab={}% | |
2725 | \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. | |
2726 | % Check for saved footnotes, etc. | |
2727 | \checkinserts | |
2728 | % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. | |
2729 | %\filbreak | |
2730 | % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the | |
2731 | % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the | |
2732 | % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. | |
2733 | }% | |
2734 | }% | |
2735 | % | |
2736 | \parsearg\domultitable | |
2737 | } | |
2738 | \def\domultitable#1{% | |
718e3744 | 2739 | % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
2740 | \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable | |
2741 | % | |
718e3744 | 2742 | % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
2743 | % be used as many times as user calls for columns. | |
2744 | % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and | |
2745 | % continue for many paragraphs if desired. | |
76b89b4a | 2746 | \halign\bgroup &% |
2747 | \global\advance\colcount by 1 | |
2748 | \multistrut | |
2749 | \vtop{% | |
2750 | % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: | |
2751 | \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname | |
2752 | % | |
2753 | % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other | |
2754 | % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after | |
2755 | % the first one. | |
2756 | % | |
2757 | % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace | |
2758 | % to the width of each template entry. | |
2759 | % | |
2760 | % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will | |
2761 | % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip | |
2762 | % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at | |
2763 | % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. | |
2764 | % | |
2765 | % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. | |
2766 | \rightskip=0pt | |
2767 | \ifnum\colcount=1 | |
2768 | % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. | |
2769 | \advance\hsize by\leftskip | |
2770 | \else | |
2771 | \ifsetpercent \else | |
2772 | % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize | |
2773 | % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. | |
2774 | \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace | |
2775 | \fi | |
2776 | % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: | |
2777 | \leftskip=\multitablecolspace | |
2778 | \fi | |
2779 | % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious | |
2780 | % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the | |
2781 | % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. | |
2782 | % For example: | |
2783 | % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 | |
2784 | % @item @code{#} | |
2785 | % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. | |
2786 | % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively | |
2787 | % marking characters. | |
2788 | \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut | |
2789 | }\cr | |
2790 | } | |
2791 | \def\Emultitable{% | |
2792 | \crcr | |
2793 | \egroup % end the \halign | |
2794 | \global\setpercentfalse | |
718e3744 | 2795 | } |
2796 | ||
0ed31928 | 2797 | \def\setmultitablespacing{% |
2798 | \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing | |
2799 | % | |
2800 | % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in | |
2801 | % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on | |
2802 | % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. | |
2803 | % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. | |
718e3744 | 2804 | \ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
76b89b4a | 2805 | \setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip |
2806 | \global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 | |
0ed31928 | 2807 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 2808 | %% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
2809 | %% table. If not, do nothing. | |
2810 | %% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. | |
718e3744 | 2811 | \ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace |
2812 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
2813 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
2814 | %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
2815 | \fi% | |
2816 | \ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt | |
2817 | \global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace | |
2818 | \global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller | |
2819 | %% than skip between lines in the table. | |
2820 | \fi} | |
2821 | ||
2822 | ||
2823 | \message{conditionals,} | |
76b89b4a | 2824 | |
2825 | % @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, | |
2826 | % @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't | |
2827 | % attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we | |
2828 | % have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't | |
2829 | % attempt to close an environment group. | |
718e3744 | 2830 | % |
76b89b4a | 2831 | \def\makecond#1{% |
2832 | \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax | |
2833 | \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 | |
2834 | } | |
2835 | \makecond{iftex} | |
2836 | \makecond{ifnotdocbook} | |
2837 | \makecond{ifnothtml} | |
2838 | \makecond{ifnotinfo} | |
2839 | \makecond{ifnotplaintext} | |
2840 | \makecond{ifnotxml} | |
718e3744 | 2841 | |
76b89b4a | 2842 | % Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. |
718e3744 | 2843 | % |
76b89b4a | 2844 | \def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
2845 | \def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} | |
2846 | \def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} | |
2847 | \def\html{\doignore{html}} | |
2848 | \def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} | |
718e3744 | 2849 | \def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
76b89b4a | 2850 | \def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
718e3744 | 2851 | \def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
76b89b4a | 2852 | \def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} |
2853 | \def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} | |
2854 | \def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} | |
718e3744 | 2855 | \def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
76b89b4a | 2856 | \def\xml{\doignore{xml}} |
718e3744 | 2857 | |
76b89b4a | 2858 | % Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. |
718e3744 | 2859 | % |
76b89b4a | 2860 | % A count to remember the depth of nesting. |
2861 | \newcount\doignorecount | |
2862 | ||
718e3744 | 2863 | \def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
76b89b4a | 2864 | % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: |
2865 | \catcode`\@ = \other | |
2866 | \catcode`\{ = \other | |
2867 | \catcode`\} = \other | |
718e3744 | 2868 | % |
2869 | % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. | |
76b89b4a | 2870 | \spaceisspace |
2871 | % | |
2872 | % Count number of #1's that we've seen. | |
2873 | \doignorecount = 0 | |
2874 | % | |
2875 | % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. | |
afc1e2dd | 2876 | \dodoignore{#1}% |
718e3744 | 2877 | } |
2878 | ||
76b89b4a | 2879 | { \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. |
2880 | \obeylines % | |
718e3744 | 2881 | % |
76b89b4a | 2882 | \gdef\dodoignore#1{% |
afc1e2dd | 2883 | % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. |
718e3744 | 2884 | % |
76b89b4a | 2885 | % Define a command to find the next `@end #1', which must be on a line |
2886 | % by itself. | |
2887 | \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% | |
2888 | % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a | |
2889 | % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for | |
2890 | % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) | |
2891 | \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% | |
718e3744 | 2892 | % |
76b89b4a | 2893 | % And now expand that command. |
2894 | \obeylines % | |
2895 | \doignoretext ^^M% | |
2896 | }% | |
2897 | } | |
2898 | ||
2899 | \def\doignoreyyy#1{% | |
2900 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
2901 | \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. | |
2902 | \let\next\doignoretextzzz | |
2903 | \else % Found a nested condition, ... | |
2904 | \advance\doignorecount by 1 | |
2905 | \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. | |
2906 | % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). | |
2907 | \fi | |
2908 | \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. | |
2909 | } | |
2910 | ||
2911 | % We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". | |
afc1e2dd | 2912 | % |
76b89b4a | 2913 | \def\doignoretextzzz#1{% |
2914 | \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. | |
2915 | \let\next\enddoignore | |
2916 | \else % Still inside a nested condition. | |
2917 | \advance\doignorecount by -1 | |
2918 | \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. | |
2919 | \fi | |
2920 | \next | |
718e3744 | 2921 | } |
2922 | ||
76b89b4a | 2923 | % Finish off ignored text. |
2924 | \def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces} | |
2925 | ||
2926 | ||
718e3744 | 2927 | % @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
2928 | % @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. | |
2929 | % | |
2930 | % Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be | |
2931 | % empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our | |
2932 | % own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we | |
76b89b4a | 2933 | % didn't need it. |
2934 | % We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. | |
718e3744 | 2935 | % |
76b89b4a | 2936 | \parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
718e3744 | 2937 | \def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
76b89b4a | 2938 | {% |
2939 | \makevalueexpandable | |
2940 | \def\temp{#2}% | |
2941 | \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% | |
2942 | \ifx\temp\empty | |
2943 | \next{}% | |
2944 | \else | |
2945 | \setzzz#2\endsetzzz | |
2946 | \fi | |
2947 | }% | |
718e3744 | 2948 | } |
76b89b4a | 2949 | % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
2950 | \def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} | |
718e3744 | 2951 | |
2952 | % @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. | |
2953 | % | |
76b89b4a | 2954 | \parseargdef\clear{% |
2955 | {% | |
2956 | \makevalueexpandable | |
2957 | \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax | |
2958 | }% | |
2959 | } | |
718e3744 | 2960 | |
2961 | % @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. | |
76b89b4a | 2962 | \def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} |
2963 | \def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} | |
718e3744 | 2964 | { |
76b89b4a | 2965 | \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active |
718e3744 | 2966 | % |
76b89b4a | 2967 | \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% |
2968 | \let\value = \expandablevalue | |
2969 | % We don't want these characters active, ... | |
2970 | \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other | |
2971 | % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if | |
2972 | % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. | |
2973 | % So \let them to their normal equivalents. | |
2974 | \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore | |
2975 | } | |
718e3744 | 2976 | } |
718e3744 | 2977 | |
2978 | % We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's | |
76b89b4a | 2979 | % properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). |
2980 | % The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since | |
2981 | % the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the | |
2982 | % variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain | |
2983 | % it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work | |
2984 | % to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). | |
718e3744 | 2985 | % |
2986 | \def\expandablevalue#1{% | |
2987 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax | |
2988 | {[No value for ``#1'']}% | |
76b89b4a | 2989 | \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% |
718e3744 | 2990 | \else |
2991 | \csname SET#1\endcsname | |
2992 | \fi | |
2993 | } | |
2994 | ||
2995 | % @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined | |
2996 | % with @set. | |
2997 | % | |
76b89b4a | 2998 | % To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine. |
2999 | % | |
3000 | \makecond{ifset} | |
3001 | \def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} | |
3002 | \def\doifset#1#2{% | |
3003 | {% | |
3004 | \makevalueexpandable | |
3005 | \let\next=\empty | |
3006 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax | |
3007 | #1% If not set, redefine \next. | |
3008 | \fi | |
3009 | \expandafter | |
3010 | }\next | |
718e3744 | 3011 | } |
76b89b4a | 3012 | \def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} |
718e3744 | 3013 | |
3014 | % @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been | |
3015 | % defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. | |
3016 | % | |
76b89b4a | 3017 | % The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the |
3018 | % above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, | |
3019 | % then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. | |
718e3744 | 3020 | % |
76b89b4a | 3021 | \makecond{ifclear} |
3022 | \def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} | |
3023 | \def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} | |
3024 | ||
3025 | % @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file | |
3026 | % which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. | |
3027 | \let\dircategory=\comment | |
718e3744 | 3028 | |
3029 | % @defininfoenclose. | |
3030 | \let\definfoenclose=\comment | |
3031 | ||
3032 | ||
3033 | \message{indexing,} | |
3034 | % Index generation facilities | |
3035 | ||
3036 | % Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite | |
0ed31928 | 3037 | % except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. |
3038 | \edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} | |
718e3744 | 3039 | |
3040 | % \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo. | |
3041 | % It automatically defines \fooindex such that | |
3042 | % \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. | |
3043 | % It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for | |
3044 | % the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. | |
3045 | % The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long | |
3046 | % for the sake of vms. | |
3047 | % | |
3048 | \def\newindex#1{% | |
3049 | \iflinks | |
3050 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3051 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file | |
3052 | \fi | |
3053 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index | |
3054 | \noexpand\doindex{#1}} | |
3055 | } | |
3056 | ||
3057 | % @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} | |
76b89b4a | 3058 | % |
718e3744 | 3059 | \def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} |
3060 | ||
3061 | % Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. | |
76b89b4a | 3062 | % |
3063 | \def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} | |
3064 | % | |
718e3744 | 3065 | \def\newcodeindex#1{% |
3066 | \iflinks | |
3067 | \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname | |
3068 | \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 | |
3069 | \fi | |
3070 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% | |
76b89b4a | 3071 | \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% |
718e3744 | 3072 | } |
3073 | ||
718e3744 | 3074 | |
3075 | % @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. | |
3076 | % Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. | |
76b89b4a | 3077 | % |
718e3744 | 3078 | % @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
3079 | % inside @code. | |
76b89b4a | 3080 | % |
3081 | \def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} | |
3082 | \def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} | |
3083 | ||
3084 | % #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), | |
3085 | % #3 the target index (bar). | |
3086 | \def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% | |
3087 | % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up | |
3088 | % closing the target index. | |
3089 | \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined | |
3090 | % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the | |
3091 | % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. | |
3092 | \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname | |
3093 | \expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1 | |
3094 | \fi | |
3095 | % redefine \fooindfile: | |
3096 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname | |
3097 | \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp | |
3098 | % redefine \fooindex: | |
3099 | \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% | |
718e3744 | 3100 | } |
3101 | ||
3102 | % Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. | |
3103 | % Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, | |
3104 | % and it is "foo", the name of the index. | |
3105 | ||
3106 | % \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work. | |
3107 | % This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros. | |
3108 | ||
3109 | % There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3110 | % which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. | |
3111 | ||
3112 | \def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer} | |
3113 | \def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} | |
3114 | ||
3115 | % like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. | |
3116 | \def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer} | |
3117 | \def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} | |
3118 | ||
76b89b4a | 3119 | % Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. |
3120 | % Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't, | |
3121 | % we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't. | |
3122 | % | |
718e3744 | 3123 | \def\indexdummies{% |
76b89b4a | 3124 | \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files. |
3125 | \def\ {\realbackslash\space }% | |
3126 | % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. | |
3127 | % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes | |
3128 | % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. | |
3129 | \let\{ = \mylbrace | |
3130 | \let\} = \myrbrace | |
3131 | % | |
3132 | % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \realbackslash #1\space, thus | |
3133 | % effectively preventing its expansion. This is used only for control | |
3134 | % words, not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect | |
3135 | % for control characters, but is needed to separate the control word | |
3136 | % from whatever follows. | |
3137 | % | |
3138 | % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the | |
3139 | % space. | |
3140 | % | |
3141 | % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and | |
3142 | % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then | |
3143 | % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). | |
3144 | % | |
3145 | \def\definedummyword##1{% | |
3146 | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1\space}% | |
3147 | }% | |
3148 | \def\definedummyletter##1{% | |
3149 | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{\realbackslash ##1}% | |
3150 | }% | |
afc1e2dd | 3151 | \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter |
76b89b4a | 3152 | % |
3153 | % Do the redefinitions. | |
3154 | \commondummies | |
3155 | } | |
3156 | ||
3157 | % For the aux file, @ is the escape character. So we want to redefine | |
3158 | % everything using @ instead of \realbackslash. When everything uses | |
3159 | % @, this will be simpler. | |
3160 | % | |
3161 | \def\atdummies{% | |
3162 | \def\@{@@}% | |
3163 | \def\ {@ }% | |
3164 | \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd | |
3165 | \let\} = \rbraceatcmd | |
3166 | % | |
3167 | % (See comments in \indexdummies.) | |
3168 | \def\definedummyword##1{% | |
3169 | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1\space}% | |
3170 | }% | |
3171 | \def\definedummyletter##1{% | |
3172 | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{@##1}% | |
3173 | }% | |
afc1e2dd | 3174 | \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter |
76b89b4a | 3175 | % |
3176 | % Do the redefinitions. | |
3177 | \commondummies | |
3178 | } | |
3179 | ||
3180 | % Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies. \definedummyword and | |
3181 | % \definedummyletter must be defined first. | |
3182 | % | |
3183 | \def\commondummies{% | |
3184 | % | |
3185 | \normalturnoffactive | |
3186 | % | |
3187 | \commondummiesnofonts | |
3188 | % | |
3189 | \definedummyletter{_}% | |
3190 | % | |
3191 | % Non-English letters. | |
3192 | \definedummyword{AA}% | |
3193 | \definedummyword{AE}% | |
3194 | \definedummyword{L}% | |
3195 | \definedummyword{OE}% | |
3196 | \definedummyword{O}% | |
3197 | \definedummyword{aa}% | |
3198 | \definedummyword{ae}% | |
3199 | \definedummyword{l}% | |
3200 | \definedummyword{oe}% | |
3201 | \definedummyword{o}% | |
3202 | \definedummyword{ss}% | |
3203 | \definedummyword{exclamdown}% | |
3204 | \definedummyword{questiondown}% | |
3205 | \definedummyword{ordf}% | |
3206 | \definedummyword{ordm}% | |
3207 | % | |
3208 | % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. | |
3209 | \definedummyword{bf}% | |
3210 | \definedummyword{gtr}% | |
3211 | \definedummyword{hat}% | |
3212 | \definedummyword{less}% | |
3213 | \definedummyword{sf}% | |
3214 | \definedummyword{sl}% | |
3215 | \definedummyword{tclose}% | |
3216 | \definedummyword{tt}% | |
3217 | % | |
3218 | \definedummyword{LaTeX}% | |
3219 | \definedummyword{TeX}% | |
3220 | % | |
3221 | % Assorted special characters. | |
3222 | \definedummyword{bullet}% | |
afc1e2dd | 3223 | \definedummyword{comma}% |
76b89b4a | 3224 | \definedummyword{copyright}% |
3225 | \definedummyword{registeredsymbol}% | |
3226 | \definedummyword{dots}% | |
3227 | \definedummyword{enddots}% | |
3228 | \definedummyword{equiv}% | |
3229 | \definedummyword{error}% | |
0ed31928 | 3230 | \definedummyword{euro}% |
76b89b4a | 3231 | \definedummyword{expansion}% |
3232 | \definedummyword{minus}% | |
3233 | \definedummyword{pounds}% | |
3234 | \definedummyword{point}% | |
3235 | \definedummyword{print}% | |
3236 | \definedummyword{result}% | |
3237 | % | |
3238 | % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any | |
3239 | % (non-fully-expandable) commands. | |
3240 | \makevalueexpandable | |
3241 | % | |
3242 | % Normal spaces, not active ones. | |
3243 | \unsepspaces | |
3244 | % | |
3245 | % No macro expansion. | |
3246 | \turnoffmacros | |
3247 | } | |
3248 | ||
3249 | % \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts. | |
3250 | % | |
3251 | % Better have this without active chars. | |
3252 | { | |
3253 | \catcode`\~=\other | |
3254 | \gdef\commondummiesnofonts{% | |
3255 | % Control letters and accents. | |
3256 | \definedummyletter{!}% | |
afc1e2dd | 3257 | \definedummyaccent{"}% |
3258 | \definedummyaccent{'}% | |
76b89b4a | 3259 | \definedummyletter{*}% |
afc1e2dd | 3260 | \definedummyaccent{,}% |
76b89b4a | 3261 | \definedummyletter{.}% |
3262 | \definedummyletter{/}% | |
3263 | \definedummyletter{:}% | |
afc1e2dd | 3264 | \definedummyaccent{=}% |
76b89b4a | 3265 | \definedummyletter{?}% |
afc1e2dd | 3266 | \definedummyaccent{^}% |
3267 | \definedummyaccent{`}% | |
3268 | \definedummyaccent{~}% | |
76b89b4a | 3269 | \definedummyword{u}% |
3270 | \definedummyword{v}% | |
3271 | \definedummyword{H}% | |
3272 | \definedummyword{dotaccent}% | |
3273 | \definedummyword{ringaccent}% | |
3274 | \definedummyword{tieaccent}% | |
3275 | \definedummyword{ubaraccent}% | |
3276 | \definedummyword{udotaccent}% | |
3277 | \definedummyword{dotless}% | |
3278 | % | |
3279 | % Texinfo font commands. | |
3280 | \definedummyword{b}% | |
3281 | \definedummyword{i}% | |
3282 | \definedummyword{r}% | |
3283 | \definedummyword{sc}% | |
3284 | \definedummyword{t}% | |
3285 | % | |
3286 | % Commands that take arguments. | |
3287 | \definedummyword{acronym}% | |
3288 | \definedummyword{cite}% | |
3289 | \definedummyword{code}% | |
3290 | \definedummyword{command}% | |
3291 | \definedummyword{dfn}% | |
3292 | \definedummyword{emph}% | |
3293 | \definedummyword{env}% | |
3294 | \definedummyword{file}% | |
3295 | \definedummyword{kbd}% | |
3296 | \definedummyword{key}% | |
3297 | \definedummyword{math}% | |
3298 | \definedummyword{option}% | |
3299 | \definedummyword{samp}% | |
3300 | \definedummyword{strong}% | |
3301 | \definedummyword{tie}% | |
3302 | \definedummyword{uref}% | |
3303 | \definedummyword{url}% | |
3304 | \definedummyword{var}% | |
3305 | \definedummyword{verb}% | |
3306 | \definedummyword{w}% | |
3307 | } | |
3308 | } | |
718e3744 | 3309 | |
76b89b4a | 3310 | % \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index |
3311 | % by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all | |
3312 | % control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string | |
3313 | % would be for a given command (usually its argument). | |
3314 | % | |
718e3744 | 3315 | \def\indexnofonts{% |
afc1e2dd | 3316 | % Accent commands should become @asis. |
3317 | \def\definedummyaccent##1{% | |
76b89b4a | 3318 | \expandafter\let\csname ##1\endcsname\asis |
3319 | }% | |
afc1e2dd | 3320 | % We can just ignore other control letters. |
3321 | \def\definedummyletter##1{% | |
3322 | \expandafter\def\csname ##1\endcsname{}% | |
3323 | }% | |
3324 | % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis. | |
3325 | \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent | |
76b89b4a | 3326 | % |
3327 | \commondummiesnofonts | |
3328 | % | |
3329 | % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command | |
3330 | % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. | |
3331 | % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. | |
3332 | %\let\tt=\asis | |
3333 | % | |
3334 | \def\ { }% | |
3335 | \def\@{@}% | |
3336 | % how to handle braces? | |
3337 | \def\_{\normalunderscore}% | |
3338 | % | |
3339 | % Non-English letters. | |
3340 | \def\AA{AA}% | |
3341 | \def\AE{AE}% | |
3342 | \def\L{L}% | |
3343 | \def\OE{OE}% | |
3344 | \def\O{O}% | |
3345 | \def\aa{aa}% | |
3346 | \def\ae{ae}% | |
3347 | \def\l{l}% | |
3348 | \def\oe{oe}% | |
3349 | \def\o{o}% | |
3350 | \def\ss{ss}% | |
3351 | \def\exclamdown{!}% | |
3352 | \def\questiondown{?}% | |
3353 | \def\ordf{a}% | |
3354 | \def\ordm{o}% | |
3355 | % | |
3356 | \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% | |
3357 | \def\TeX{TeX}% | |
3358 | % | |
3359 | % Assorted special characters. | |
3360 | % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.) | |
3361 | \def\bullet{bullet}% | |
afc1e2dd | 3362 | \def\comma{,}% |
76b89b4a | 3363 | \def\copyright{copyright}% |
3364 | \def\registeredsymbol{R}% | |
3365 | \def\dots{...}% | |
3366 | \def\enddots{...}% | |
3367 | \def\equiv{==}% | |
3368 | \def\error{error}% | |
0ed31928 | 3369 | \def\euro{euro}% |
76b89b4a | 3370 | \def\expansion{==>}% |
3371 | \def\minus{-}% | |
3372 | \def\pounds{pounds}% | |
3373 | \def\point{.}% | |
3374 | \def\print{-|}% | |
3375 | \def\result{=>}% | |
afc1e2dd | 3376 | % |
3377 | % Don't write macro names. | |
3378 | \emptyusermacros | |
76b89b4a | 3379 | } |
718e3744 | 3380 | |
3381 | \let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. | |
3382 | \let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? | |
3383 | ||
718e3744 | 3384 | % Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. |
76b89b4a | 3385 | % #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. |
3386 | \def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} | |
718e3744 | 3387 | |
3388 | % Workhorse for all \fooindexes. | |
3389 | % #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- | |
76b89b4a | 3390 | % empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception |
3391 | % is with most defuns, which call us directly). | |
718e3744 | 3392 | % |
3393 | \def\dosubind#1#2#3{% | |
76b89b4a | 3394 | \iflinks |
3395 | {% | |
3396 | % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). | |
3397 | \toks0 = {#2}% | |
3398 | % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. | |
3399 | \def\thirdarg{#3}% | |
3400 | \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else | |
3401 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% | |
3402 | \fi | |
3403 | % | |
3404 | \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% | |
3405 | % | |
3406 | \ifvmode | |
3407 | \dosubindsanitize | |
3408 | \else | |
3409 | \dosubindwrite | |
3410 | \fi | |
3411 | }% | |
3412 | \fi | |
3413 | } | |
3414 | ||
3415 | % Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file: | |
3416 | % | |
3417 | \def\dosubindwrite{% | |
718e3744 | 3418 | % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
3419 | \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else | |
76b89b4a | 3420 | \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% |
718e3744 | 3421 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 3422 | % |
3423 | % Remember, we are within a group. | |
3424 | \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage | |
3425 | \escapechar=`\\ | |
3426 | \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now | |
3427 | % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. | |
3428 | % | |
3429 | % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to | |
3430 | % get the string to sort by. | |
3431 | {\indexnofonts | |
3432 | \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion | |
3433 | \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}% | |
718e3744 | 3434 | }% |
76b89b4a | 3435 | % |
3436 | % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and | |
3437 | % the original text, including any font commands. We write | |
3438 | % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the | |
3439 | % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s | |
3440 | % sorted result. | |
3441 | \edef\temp{% | |
3442 | \write\writeto{% | |
3443 | \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% | |
3444 | }% | |
3445 | \temp | |
3446 | } | |
3447 | ||
3448 | % Take care of unwanted page breaks: | |
3449 | % | |
3450 | % If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it | |
3451 | % by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting | |
3452 | % the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the | |
3453 | % \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences | |
3454 | % like this: | |
3455 | % @end defun | |
3456 | % @tindex whatever | |
3457 | % @defun ... | |
3458 | % will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the | |
3459 | % start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of | |
3460 | % the previous defun. | |
3461 | % | |
3462 | % But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We | |
3463 | % don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. | |
3464 | % | |
3465 | % Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. | |
3466 | % | |
3467 | % But wait, there is a catch there: | |
3468 | % We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not | |
3469 | % sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts | |
3470 | % of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual | |
3471 | % representation of the skip. | |
3472 | % | |
3473 | % The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that | |
3474 | % the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). | |
3475 | % | |
3476 | \edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} | |
3477 | % | |
3478 | % ..., ready, GO: | |
3479 | % | |
3480 | \def\dosubindsanitize{% | |
3481 | % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. | |
3482 | \skip0 = \lastskip | |
3483 | \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% | |
3484 | \count255 = \lastpenalty | |
3485 | % | |
3486 | % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a | |
3487 | % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this | |
3488 | % -\skip0 glue we're inserting is preceded by a | |
3489 | % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential | |
3490 | % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. | |
3491 | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
3492 | \else | |
3493 | \vskip-\skip0 | |
3494 | \fi | |
3495 | % | |
3496 | \dosubindwrite | |
3497 | % | |
3498 | \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro | |
afc1e2dd | 3499 | % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and |
3500 | % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want | |
3501 | % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various | |
3502 | % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any | |
3503 | % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: | |
3504 | % | |
76b89b4a | 3505 | % @deffn deffn-whatever |
3506 | % @vindex index-whatever | |
3507 | % Description. | |
3508 | % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit | |
3509 | % and the "Description." paragraph. | |
afc1e2dd | 3510 | \ifnum\count255>9999 \penalty\count255 \fi |
76b89b4a | 3511 | \else |
3512 | % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, | |
3513 | % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item | |
3514 | % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. | |
3515 | \nobreak\vskip\skip0 | |
3516 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 3517 | } |
3518 | ||
3519 | % The index entry written in the file actually looks like | |
3520 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} | |
3521 | % or | |
3522 | % \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} | |
3523 | % The texindex program reads in these files and writes files | |
3524 | % containing these kinds of lines: | |
3525 | % \initial {c} | |
3526 | % before the first topic whose initial is c | |
3527 | % \entry {topic}{pagelist} | |
3528 | % for a topic that is used without subtopics | |
3529 | % \primary {topic} | |
3530 | % for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics | |
3531 | % \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} | |
3532 | % for each subtopic. | |
3533 | ||
3534 | % Define the user-accessible indexing commands | |
3535 | % @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. | |
3536 | ||
3537 | \def\findex {\fnindex} | |
3538 | \def\kindex {\kyindex} | |
3539 | \def\cindex {\cpindex} | |
3540 | \def\vindex {\vrindex} | |
3541 | \def\tindex {\tpindex} | |
3542 | \def\pindex {\pgindex} | |
3543 | ||
3544 | \def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} | |
3545 | {\obeylines % | |
3546 | \gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % | |
3547 | \dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} | |
3548 | ||
3549 | % Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. | |
3550 | ||
3551 | % @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. | |
3552 | % It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). | |
3553 | % | |
76b89b4a | 3554 | \parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup |
718e3744 | 3555 | \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
3556 | % | |
76b89b4a | 3557 | \smallfonts \rm |
718e3744 | 3558 | \tolerance = 9500 |
76b89b4a | 3559 | \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. |
718e3744 | 3560 | % |
3561 | % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. | |
3562 | % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains | |
3563 | % \initial {@} | |
3564 | % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces | |
3565 | % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). | |
3566 | \catcode`\@ = 11 | |
3567 | \openin 1 \jobname.#1s | |
3568 | \ifeof 1 | |
3569 | % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, | |
3570 | % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the | |
3571 | % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure | |
3572 | % there is some text. | |
3573 | \putwordIndexNonexistent | |
3574 | \else | |
3575 | % | |
3576 | % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof | |
3577 | % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so | |
3578 | % it can discover if there is anything in it. | |
3579 | \read 1 to \temp | |
3580 | \ifeof 1 | |
3581 | \putwordIndexIsEmpty | |
3582 | \else | |
3583 | % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape | |
3584 | % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change | |
3585 | % to make right now. | |
76b89b4a | 3586 | \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}% |
718e3744 | 3587 | \catcode`\\ = 0 |
3588 | \escapechar = `\\ | |
3589 | \begindoublecolumns | |
3590 | \input \jobname.#1s | |
3591 | \enddoublecolumns | |
3592 | \fi | |
3593 | \fi | |
3594 | \closein 1 | |
3595 | \endgroup} | |
3596 | ||
3597 | % These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. | |
3598 | % Change them to control the appearance of the index. | |
3599 | ||
3600 | \def\initial#1{{% | |
3601 | % Some minor font changes for the special characters. | |
3602 | \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt | |
3603 | % | |
3604 | % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. | |
3605 | \removelastskip | |
3606 | % | |
3607 | % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. | |
afc1e2dd | 3608 | \nobreak |
3609 | \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip | |
3610 | \penalty 0 | |
3611 | \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip | |
718e3744 | 3612 | % |
3613 | % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of | |
3614 | % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column | |
3615 | % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch | |
3616 | % we need before each entry, but it's better. | |
3617 | % | |
3618 | % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. | |
3619 | \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip | |
3620 | \leftline{\secbf #1}% | |
718e3744 | 3621 | % Do our best not to break after the initial. |
3622 | \nobreak | |
afc1e2dd | 3623 | \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
718e3744 | 3624 | }} |
3625 | ||
76b89b4a | 3626 | % \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and |
3627 | % then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index | |
3628 | % and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. | |
718e3744 | 3629 | % |
76b89b4a | 3630 | % A straightforward implementation would start like this: |
3631 | % \def\entry#1#2{... | |
3632 | % But this frozes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to | |
3633 | % @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge--- | |
3634 | % ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right. | |
afc1e2dd | 3635 | % |
76b89b4a | 3636 | % The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text. |
3637 | % --kasal, 21nov03 | |
3638 | \def\entry{% | |
3639 | \begingroup | |
718e3744 | 3640 | % |
76b89b4a | 3641 | % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
3642 | % affect previous text. | |
3643 | \par | |
718e3744 | 3644 | % |
76b89b4a | 3645 | % Do not fill out the last line with white space. |
3646 | \parfillskip = 0in | |
3647 | % | |
3648 | % No extra space above this paragraph. | |
3649 | \parskip = 0in | |
3650 | % | |
3651 | % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. | |
3652 | \finalhyphendemerits = 0 | |
3653 | % | |
3654 | % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number | |
3655 | % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the | |
3656 | % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large | |
3657 | % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across | |
3658 | % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders. | |
3659 | % | |
3660 | % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start | |
3661 | % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. | |
3662 | \hangindent = 2em | |
3663 | % | |
3664 | % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line | |
3665 | % with blank space. | |
3666 | \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil | |
3667 | % | |
3668 | % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing | |
3669 | % columns. | |
3670 | \vskip 0pt plus1pt | |
3671 | % | |
3672 | % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): | |
3673 | \afterassignment\doentry | |
3674 | \let\temp = | |
3675 | } | |
3676 | \def\doentry{% | |
3677 | \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. | |
3678 | \noindent | |
3679 | \aftergroup\finishentry | |
3680 | % And now comes the text of the entry. | |
3681 | } | |
3682 | \def\finishentry#1{% | |
3683 | % #1 is the page number. | |
3684 | % | |
3685 | % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if | |
3686 | % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be | |
3687 | % cursed by a Unix daemon. | |
3688 | \def\tempa{{\rm }}% | |
3689 | \def\tempb{#1}% | |
3690 | \edef\tempc{\tempa}% | |
3691 | \edef\tempd{\tempb}% | |
3692 | \ifx\tempc\tempd | |
3693 | \ % | |
3694 | \else | |
3695 | % | |
3696 | % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out | |
3697 | % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the | |
3698 | % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.) | |
3699 | \hfil\penalty50 | |
3700 | \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. | |
3701 | % | |
3702 | % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as | |
3703 | % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull | |
3704 | % \hbox ensues. | |
3705 | \ifpdf | |
3706 | \pdfgettoks#1.% | |
3707 | \ \the\toksA | |
3708 | \else | |
3709 | \ #1% | |
3710 | \fi | |
3711 | \fi | |
3712 | \par | |
3713 | \endgroup | |
3714 | } | |
718e3744 | 3715 | |
3716 | % Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em. | |
3717 | \def\indexdotfill{\cleaders | |
3718 | \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill} | |
3719 | ||
3720 | \def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} | |
3721 | ||
3722 | \newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm | |
76b89b4a | 3723 | \def\secondary#1#2{{% |
3724 | \parfillskip=0in | |
3725 | \parskip=0in | |
3726 | \hangindent=1in | |
3727 | \hangafter=1 | |
3728 | \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill | |
3729 | \ifpdf | |
3730 | \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. | |
3731 | \else | |
3732 | #2 | |
3733 | \fi | |
3734 | \par | |
718e3744 | 3735 | }} |
3736 | ||
3737 | % Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. | |
3738 | % Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, | |
3739 | % the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. | |
3740 | \catcode`\@=11 | |
3741 | ||
3742 | \newbox\partialpage | |
3743 | \newdimen\doublecolumnhsize | |
3744 | ||
3745 | \def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns | |
3746 | % Grab any single-column material above us. | |
3747 | \output = {% | |
3748 | % | |
3749 | % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a | |
3750 | % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output | |
3751 | % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is | |
3752 | % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In | |
3753 | % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal | |
3754 | % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this | |
3755 | % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. | |
3756 | \ifvoid\partialpage \else | |
3757 | \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% | |
3758 | \fi | |
3759 | % | |
3760 | \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% | |
3761 | % Unvbox the main output page. | |
3762 | \unvbox\PAGE | |
3763 | \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip | |
3764 | }% | |
3765 | }% | |
3766 | \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage | |
3767 | % | |
3768 | % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. | |
3769 | \output = {\doublecolumnout}% | |
3770 | % | |
3771 | % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this | |
3772 | % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 | |
3773 | % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple | |
3774 | % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the | |
3775 | % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. | |
3776 | % | |
3777 | % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between | |
3778 | % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it | |
3779 | % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant | |
3780 | % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) | |
3781 | % as it did when we hard-coded it. | |
3782 | % | |
3783 | % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we | |
3784 | % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) | |
3785 | % been clobbered. | |
3786 | % | |
3787 | \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize | |
3788 | \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize | |
3789 | \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 | |
3790 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
3791 | % | |
3792 | % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, | |
3793 | % since nobody clobbers \vsize.) | |
718e3744 | 3794 | \vsize = 2\vsize |
3795 | } | |
3796 | ||
3797 | % The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except | |
3798 | % the last. | |
3799 | % | |
3800 | \def\doublecolumnout{% | |
3801 | \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth | |
3802 | % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal | |
3803 | % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the | |
3804 | % previous page. | |
3805 | \dimen@ = \vsize | |
3806 | \divide\dimen@ by 2 | |
76b89b4a | 3807 | \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage |
718e3744 | 3808 | % |
3809 | % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. | |
3810 | \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ | |
3811 | \onepageout\pagesofar | |
3812 | \unvbox255 | |
3813 | \penalty\outputpenalty | |
3814 | } | |
76b89b4a | 3815 | % |
3816 | % Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, | |
3817 | % followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. | |
718e3744 | 3818 | \def\pagesofar{% |
718e3744 | 3819 | \unvbox\partialpage |
3820 | % | |
3821 | \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize | |
3822 | \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize | |
3823 | \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% | |
3824 | } | |
76b89b4a | 3825 | % |
3826 | % All done with double columns. | |
718e3744 | 3827 | \def\enddoublecolumns{% |
3828 | \output = {% | |
3829 | % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the | |
3830 | % current page, no automatic page break. | |
3831 | \balancecolumns | |
3832 | % | |
3833 | % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, | |
3834 | % though, there will be another page break right after this \output | |
3835 | % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not | |
3836 | % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal | |
3837 | % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be | |
3838 | % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes | |
3839 | % the output somewhat more palatable.) | |
3840 | \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% | |
3841 | }% | |
3842 | \eject | |
3843 | \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns | |
3844 | % | |
3845 | % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted | |
3846 | % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column | |
3847 | % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the | |
3848 | % \endgroup where \vsize got restored). | |
3849 | \pagegoal = \vsize | |
3850 | } | |
76b89b4a | 3851 | % |
3852 | % Called at the end of the double column material. | |
718e3744 | 3853 | \def\balancecolumns{% |
718e3744 | 3854 | \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. |
3855 | \dimen@ = \ht0 | |
3856 | \advance\dimen@ by \topskip | |
3857 | \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip | |
3858 | \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to | |
3859 | %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% | |
3860 | \splittopskip = \topskip | |
3861 | % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. | |
3862 | {% | |
3863 | \vbadness = 10000 | |
3864 | \loop | |
3865 | \global\setbox3 = \copy0 | |
3866 | \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ | |
3867 | \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ | |
3868 | \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt | |
3869 | \repeat | |
3870 | }% | |
3871 | %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% | |
3872 | \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% | |
3873 | \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% | |
3874 | % | |
3875 | \pagesofar | |
3876 | } | |
3877 | \catcode`\@ = \other | |
3878 | ||
3879 | ||
3880 | \message{sectioning,} | |
76b89b4a | 3881 | % Chapters, sections, etc. |
3882 | ||
3883 | % \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered | |
3884 | % sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf | |
3885 | % outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter | |
3886 | % numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 | |
3887 | % chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) | |
3888 | \newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 | |
718e3744 | 3889 | \newcount\chapno |
3890 | \newcount\secno \secno=0 | |
3891 | \newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 | |
3892 | \newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 | |
3893 | ||
3894 | % This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... | |
3895 | \newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ | |
76b89b4a | 3896 | % |
3897 | % \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} | |
3898 | % We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple | |
3899 | % construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual | |
3900 | % letter in the expansion, not just typeset. | |
afc1e2dd | 3901 | % |
76b89b4a | 3902 | \def\appendixletter{% |
3903 | \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% | |
3904 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% | |
3905 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% | |
3906 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% | |
3907 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% | |
3908 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% | |
3909 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% | |
3910 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% | |
3911 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% | |
3912 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% | |
3913 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% | |
3914 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% | |
3915 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% | |
3916 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% | |
3917 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% | |
3918 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% | |
3919 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% | |
3920 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% | |
3921 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% | |
3922 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% | |
3923 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% | |
3924 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% | |
3925 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% | |
3926 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% | |
3927 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% | |
3928 | \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% | |
3929 | % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is | |
3930 | % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not | |
3931 | % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out | |
3932 | % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. | |
3933 | \else\char\the\appendixno | |
3934 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi | |
3935 | \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} | |
718e3744 | 3936 | |
3937 | % Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. | |
3938 | % page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. | |
76b89b4a | 3939 | % However, they are not reliable, because we don't use marks. |
718e3744 | 3940 | \def\thischapter{} |
3941 | \def\thissection{} | |
3942 | ||
3943 | \newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level | |
76b89b4a | 3944 | \newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count |
718e3744 | 3945 | |
3946 | % @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. | |
3947 | \def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} | |
3948 | \let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name | |
3949 | ||
3950 | % @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. | |
3951 | \def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} | |
3952 | \let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name | |
3953 | ||
76b89b4a | 3954 | % we only have subsub. |
3955 | \chardef\maxseclevel = 3 | |
3956 | % | |
3957 | % A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. | |
3958 | % To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: | |
3959 | \chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel | |
3960 | % | |
3961 | % Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: | |
3962 | % \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. | |
3963 | \def\chapheadtype{N} | |
3964 | ||
3965 | % Choose a heading macro | |
3966 | % #1 is heading type | |
3967 | % #2 is heading level | |
3968 | % #3 is text for heading | |
3969 | \def\genhead#1#2#3{% | |
3970 | % Compute the abs. sec. level: | |
3971 | \absseclevel=#2 | |
3972 | \advance\absseclevel by \secbase | |
3973 | % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: | |
3974 | \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 | |
3975 | \absseclevel = 0 | |
718e3744 | 3976 | \else |
76b89b4a | 3977 | \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 |
3978 | \absseclevel = 3 | |
3979 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 3980 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 3981 | % The heading type: |
3982 | \def\headtype{#1}% | |
3983 | \if \headtype U% | |
3984 | \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel | |
3985 | \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel | |
3986 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 3987 | \else |
76b89b4a | 3988 | % Check for appendix sections: |
3989 | \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 | |
3990 | \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% | |
3991 | \else | |
3992 | \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% | |
3993 | \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% | |
3994 | \fi\fi | |
3995 | \fi | |
3996 | % Check for numbered within unnumbered: | |
3997 | \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel | |
3998 | \def\headtype{U}% | |
3999 | \else | |
4000 | \chardef\unmlevel = 3 | |
4001 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 4002 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 4003 | % Now print the heading: |
4004 | \if \headtype U% | |
4005 | \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4006 | \unnumberedzzz{#3}% | |
4007 | \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% | |
4008 | \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4009 | \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4010 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 4011 | \else |
76b89b4a | 4012 | \if \headtype A% |
4013 | \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4014 | \appendixzzz{#3}% | |
4015 | \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% | |
4016 | \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4017 | \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4018 | \fi | |
4019 | \else | |
4020 | \ifcase\absseclevel | |
4021 | \chapterzzz{#3}% | |
4022 | \or \seczzz{#3}% | |
4023 | \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4024 | \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% | |
4025 | \fi | |
4026 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 4027 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 4028 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent |
718e3744 | 4029 | } |
4030 | ||
76b89b4a | 4031 | % an interface: |
4032 | \def\numhead{\genhead N} | |
4033 | \def\apphead{\genhead A} | |
4034 | \def\unnmhead{\genhead U} | |
718e3744 | 4035 | |
76b89b4a | 4036 | % @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset |
4037 | % all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. | |
afc1e2dd | 4038 | % |
76b89b4a | 4039 | % Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers |
4040 | % (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. | |
4041 | \let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
afc1e2dd | 4042 | % |
76b89b4a | 4043 | \outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
4044 | \def\chapterzzz#1{% | |
4045 | % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such | |
4046 | % as an @include file. | |
4047 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4048 | \global\advance\chapno by 1 | |
4049 | % | |
4050 | % Used for \float. | |
4051 | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% | |
4052 | \resetallfloatnos | |
4053 | % | |
4054 | \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% | |
4055 | % | |
4056 | % Write the actual heading. | |
4057 | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% | |
4058 | % | |
4059 | % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. | |
4060 | \global\let\section = \numberedsec | |
4061 | \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4062 | \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
4063 | } | |
4064 | ||
4065 | \outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz | |
4066 | \def\appendixzzz#1{% | |
4067 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4068 | \global\advance\appendixno by 1 | |
4069 | \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% | |
4070 | \resetallfloatnos | |
4071 | % | |
4072 | \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% | |
4073 | \message{\appendixnum}% | |
4074 | % | |
4075 | \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% | |
4076 | % | |
4077 | \global\let\section = \appendixsec | |
4078 | \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec | |
4079 | \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec | |
718e3744 | 4080 | } |
4081 | ||
76b89b4a | 4082 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
4083 | \def\unnumberedzzz#1{% | |
4084 | \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 | |
4085 | \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 | |
4086 | % | |
4087 | % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. | |
4088 | \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty | |
4089 | \resetallfloatnos | |
4090 | % | |
4091 | % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the | |
4092 | % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX | |
4093 | % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX | |
4094 | % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant | |
4095 | % to be executed, not expanded). | |
4096 | % | |
4097 | % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear | |
4098 | % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use | |
4099 | % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, | |
4100 | % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for | |
4101 | % the toc entries.) | |
4102 | \toks0 = {#1}% | |
4103 | \message{(\the\toks0)}% | |
4104 | % | |
4105 | \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% | |
4106 | % | |
4107 | \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec | |
4108 | \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec | |
4109 | \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec | |
4110 | } | |
4111 | ||
4112 | % @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. | |
4113 | \outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% | |
4114 | % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break | |
4115 | % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level. | |
4116 | % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04 | |
4117 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters | |
4118 | \unnmhead0{#1}% | |
4119 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
4120 | } | |
4121 | ||
4122 | % @top is like @unnumbered. | |
4123 | \let\top\unnumbered | |
4124 | ||
4125 | % Sections. | |
4126 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz | |
4127 | \def\seczzz#1{% | |
4128 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4129 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% | |
4130 | } | |
4131 | ||
4132 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz | |
4133 | \def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% | |
4134 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4135 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% | |
4136 | } | |
4137 | \let\appendixsec\appendixsection | |
4138 | ||
4139 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz | |
4140 | \def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% | |
4141 | \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 | |
4142 | \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% | |
4143 | } | |
718e3744 | 4144 | |
4145 | % Subsections. | |
76b89b4a | 4146 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
4147 | \def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4148 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4149 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4150 | } | |
4151 | ||
4152 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz | |
4153 | \def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% | |
4154 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4155 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4156 | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
4157 | } | |
4158 | ||
4159 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz | |
4160 | \def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% | |
4161 | \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 | |
4162 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4163 | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% | |
718e3744 | 4164 | } |
4165 | ||
4166 | % Subsubsections. | |
76b89b4a | 4167 | \outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
4168 | \def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4169 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4170 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% | |
4171 | {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4172 | } | |
4173 | ||
4174 | \outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz | |
4175 | \def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4176 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4177 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% | |
4178 | {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4179 | } | |
4180 | ||
4181 | \outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz | |
4182 | \def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% | |
4183 | \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 | |
4184 | \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% | |
4185 | {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% | |
4186 | } | |
718e3744 | 4187 | |
4188 | % These macros control what the section commands do, according | |
4189 | % to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). | |
4190 | % Define them by default for a numbered chapter. | |
76b89b4a | 4191 | \let\section = \numberedsec |
4192 | \let\subsection = \numberedsubsec | |
4193 | \let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec | |
718e3744 | 4194 | |
4195 | % Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading | |
4196 | ||
4197 | % NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: | |
4198 | % 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit | |
4199 | % overlong headings to fold. | |
4200 | % 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a | |
4201 | % heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. | |
4202 | % 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and | |
4203 | % if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. | |
4204 | ||
4205 | ||
76b89b4a | 4206 | \def\majorheading{% |
4207 | {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% | |
4208 | \parsearg\chapheadingzzz | |
4209 | } | |
718e3744 | 4210 | |
76b89b4a | 4211 | \def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} |
4212 | \def\chapheadingzzz#1{% | |
4213 | {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4214 | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4215 | \rm #1\hfill}}% | |
4216 | \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax | |
4217 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent | |
4218 | } | |
718e3744 | 4219 | |
4220 | % @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. | |
76b89b4a | 4221 | \parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} |
4222 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4223 | \parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4224 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
4225 | \parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} | |
4226 | \suppressfirstparagraphindent} | |
718e3744 | 4227 | |
4228 | % These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only | |
4229 | % (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), | |
4230 | % given all the information in convenient, parsed form. | |
4231 | ||
4232 | %%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) | |
4233 | \def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} | |
4234 | ||
718e3744 | 4235 | %%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it |
4236 | % Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) | |
4237 | ||
4238 | \newskip\chapheadingskip | |
4239 | ||
4240 | \def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} | |
4241 | \def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} | |
4242 | \def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi} | |
4243 | ||
4244 | \def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} | |
4245 | ||
4246 | \def\CHAPPAGoff{% | |
4247 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4248 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak | |
4249 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} | |
4250 | ||
4251 | \def\CHAPPAGon{% | |
4252 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager | |
4253 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager | |
4254 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager | |
4255 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} | |
4256 | ||
76b89b4a | 4257 | \def\CHAPPAGodd{% |
718e3744 | 4258 | \global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
4259 | \global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4260 | \global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage | |
4261 | \global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} | |
4262 | ||
4263 | \CHAPPAGon | |
4264 | ||
76b89b4a | 4265 | % Chapter opening. |
afc1e2dd | 4266 | % |
76b89b4a | 4267 | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, |
4268 | % Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. | |
afc1e2dd | 4269 | % |
76b89b4a | 4270 | % To test against our argument. |
4271 | \def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} | |
4272 | \def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} | |
4273 | \def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} | |
4274 | % | |
4275 | \def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% | |
718e3744 | 4276 | \pchapsepmacro |
4277 | {% | |
4278 | \chapfonts \rm | |
76b89b4a | 4279 | % |
4280 | % Have to define \thissection before calling \donoderef, because the | |
4281 | % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called | |
4282 | % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. | |
4283 | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4284 | \gdef\thischaptername{#1}% | |
4285 | % | |
4286 | % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix | |
4287 | % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. | |
4288 | \def\temptype{#2}% | |
4289 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
4290 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4291 | \def\toctype{unnchap}% | |
0ed31928 | 4292 | \gdef\thischapter{#1}% |
76b89b4a | 4293 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword |
4294 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry | |
4295 | \def\toctype{omit}% | |
0ed31928 | 4296 | \gdef\thischapter{}% |
76b89b4a | 4297 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword |
4298 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% | |
4299 | \def\toctype{app}% | |
4300 | % We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter | |
4301 | % because we don't want its macros evaluated now. And we don't | |
4302 | % use \thissection because that changes with each section. | |
4303 | % | |
4304 | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: | |
4305 | \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4306 | \else | |
4307 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% | |
4308 | \def\toctype{numchap}% | |
4309 | \xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: | |
4310 | \noexpand\thischaptername}% | |
4311 | \fi\fi\fi | |
4312 | % | |
4313 | % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the | |
4314 | % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc | |
4315 | % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. | |
4316 | \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% | |
4317 | % | |
4318 | % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make | |
4319 | % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has | |
4320 | % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the | |
4321 | % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not | |
4322 | % being visible, for instance under high magnification. | |
4323 | \donoderef{#2}% | |
4324 | % | |
4325 | % Typeset the actual heading. | |
718e3744 | 4326 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
76b89b4a | 4327 | \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
718e3744 | 4328 | \unhbox0 #1\par}% |
4329 | }% | |
4330 | \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title | |
4331 | \nobreak | |
4332 | } | |
4333 | ||
718e3744 | 4334 | % @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. |
4335 | \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax | |
76b89b4a | 4336 | \def\centerparameters{% |
4337 | \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip | |
4338 | \leftskip = \rightskip | |
4339 | \parfillskip = 0pt | |
4340 | } | |
718e3744 | 4341 | |
718e3744 | 4342 | |
76b89b4a | 4343 | % I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not |
4344 | % updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03. | |
afc1e2dd | 4345 | % |
76b89b4a | 4346 | \def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname} |
4347 | % | |
718e3744 | 4348 | \def\unnchfopen #1{% |
4349 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4350 | \parindent=0pt\raggedright | |
4351 | \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4352 | } | |
718e3744 | 4353 | \def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
4354 | \vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}% | |
4355 | \par\penalty 5000 % | |
4356 | } | |
718e3744 | 4357 | \def\centerchfopen #1{% |
4358 | \chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 | |
4359 | \parindent=0pt | |
4360 | \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak | |
4361 | } | |
76b89b4a | 4362 | \def\CHAPFopen{% |
4363 | \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen | |
4364 | \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} | |
718e3744 | 4365 | |
4366 | ||
76b89b4a | 4367 | % Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and |
4368 | % call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. | |
afc1e2dd | 4369 | % |
718e3744 | 4370 | \newskip\secheadingskip |
76b89b4a | 4371 | \def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} |
718e3744 | 4372 | |
4373 | % Subsection titles. | |
76b89b4a | 4374 | \newskip\subsecheadingskip |
4375 | \def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} | |
718e3744 | 4376 | |
4377 | % Subsubsection titles. | |
76b89b4a | 4378 | \def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} |
4379 | \def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} | |
718e3744 | 4380 | |
4381 | ||
76b89b4a | 4382 | % Print any size, any type, section title. |
afc1e2dd | 4383 | % |
76b89b4a | 4384 | % #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is |
4385 | % the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the | |
4386 | % section number. | |
afc1e2dd | 4387 | % |
76b89b4a | 4388 | \def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% |
718e3744 | 4389 | {% |
4390 | % Switch to the right set of fonts. | |
76b89b4a | 4391 | \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm |
4392 | % | |
4393 | % Insert space above the heading. | |
4394 | \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname | |
4395 | % | |
4396 | % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. | |
4397 | \def\sectionlevel{#2}% | |
4398 | \def\temptype{#3}% | |
4399 | % | |
4400 | \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword | |
4401 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4402 | \def\toctype{unn}% | |
4403 | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4404 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword | |
4405 | % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, | |
4406 | % and don't redefine \thissection. | |
4407 | \setbox0 = \hbox{}% | |
4408 | \def\toctype{omit}% | |
4409 | \let\sectionlevel=\empty | |
4410 | \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword | |
4411 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
4412 | \def\toctype{app}% | |
4413 | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4414 | \else | |
4415 | \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% | |
4416 | \def\toctype{num}% | |
4417 | \gdef\thissection{#1}% | |
4418 | \fi\fi\fi | |
4419 | % | |
4420 | % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chfplain. | |
4421 | \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% | |
718e3744 | 4422 | % |
76b89b4a | 4423 | % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). |
4424 | % Again, see comments in \chfplain. | |
4425 | \donoderef{#3}% | |
718e3744 | 4426 | % |
76b89b4a | 4427 | % Output the actual section heading. |
718e3744 | 4428 | \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
76b89b4a | 4429 | \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number |
4430 | \unhbox0 #1}% | |
718e3744 | 4431 | }% |
76b89b4a | 4432 | % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. |
4433 | % Don't allow stretch, though. | |
4434 | \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname | |
4435 | % | |
4436 | % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it | |
4437 | % was followed by glue. | |
4438 | \nobreak | |
4439 | % | |
4440 | % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that | |
4441 | % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a | |
4442 | % discardable item.) | |
4443 | \vskip-\parskip | |
afc1e2dd | 4444 | % |
4445 | % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty > | |
4446 | % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after | |
4447 | % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between: | |
4448 | % | |
76b89b4a | 4449 | % @section sec-whatever |
4450 | % @deffn def-whatever | |
afc1e2dd | 4451 | \penalty 10001 |
718e3744 | 4452 | } |
4453 | ||
4454 | ||
4455 | \message{toc,} | |
76b89b4a | 4456 | % Table of contents. |
718e3744 | 4457 | \newwrite\tocfile |
4458 | ||
4459 | % Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. | |
afc1e2dd | 4460 | % Called from @chapter, etc. |
4461 | % | |
76b89b4a | 4462 | % Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} |
4463 | % We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional | |
4464 | % arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually | |
4465 | % read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the | |
4466 | % destination to jump to. | |
afc1e2dd | 4467 | % |
76b89b4a | 4468 | % We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or |
4469 | % any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. | |
4470 | % But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the | |
4471 | % table of contents chapter openings themselves. | |
718e3744 | 4472 | % |
4473 | \newif\iftocfileopened | |
76b89b4a | 4474 | \def\omitkeyword{omit}% |
4475 | % | |
4476 | \def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% | |
4477 | \edef\writetoctype{#1}% | |
4478 | \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else | |
4479 | \iftocfileopened\else | |
4480 | \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc | |
4481 | \global\tocfileopenedtrue | |
4482 | \fi | |
4483 | % | |
4484 | \iflinks | |
4485 | \toks0 = {#2}% | |
4486 | \toks2 = \expandafter{\lastnode}% | |
4487 | \edef\temp{\write\tocfile{\realbackslash #1entry{\the\toks0}{#3}% | |
4488 | {\the\toks2}{\noexpand\folio}}}% | |
4489 | \temp | |
4490 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 4491 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 4492 | % |
4493 | % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're | |
4494 | % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't | |
4495 | % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered | |
4496 | % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first | |
4497 | % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named | |
4498 | % `1', and two named `2'. | |
4499 | \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi | |
718e3744 | 4500 | } |
4501 | ||
4502 | \newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in | |
4503 | \newcount\savepageno | |
4504 | \newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 | |
4505 | ||
76b89b4a | 4506 | % Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. |
718e3744 | 4507 | % |
4508 | \def\startcontents#1{% | |
76b89b4a | 4509 | % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
4510 | % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain | |
4511 | % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. | |
4512 | % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> | |
4513 | \contentsalignmacro | |
4514 | \immediate\closeout\tocfile | |
4515 | % | |
4516 | % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. | |
4517 | % It is abundantly clear what they are. | |
4518 | \def\thischapter{}% | |
4519 | \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% | |
4520 | % | |
4521 | \savepageno = \pageno | |
4522 | \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. | |
4523 | \catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 | |
4524 | % We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section | |
4525 | % title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. | |
4526 | %\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi | |
4527 | \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. | |
4528 | \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. | |
4529 | % | |
4530 | % Roman numerals for page numbers. | |
4531 | \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi | |
718e3744 | 4532 | } |
4533 | ||
4534 | ||
4535 | % Normal (long) toc. | |
4536 | \def\contents{% | |
76b89b4a | 4537 | \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% |
4538 | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | |
4539 | \ifeof 1 \else | |
4540 | \input \jobname.toc | |
4541 | \fi | |
4542 | \vfill \eject | |
4543 | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
4544 | \ifeof 1 \else | |
4545 | \pdfmakeoutlines | |
4546 | \fi | |
4547 | \closein 1 | |
4548 | \endgroup | |
4549 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
4550 | \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
718e3744 | 4551 | } |
4552 | ||
4553 | % And just the chapters. | |
4554 | \def\summarycontents{% | |
76b89b4a | 4555 | \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% |
4556 | % | |
4557 | \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry | |
4558 | \let\appentry = \shortchapentry | |
4559 | \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry | |
4560 | % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. | |
4561 | \secfonts | |
4562 | \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf | |
4563 | \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt | |
4564 | \rm | |
4565 | \hyphenpenalty = 10000 | |
4566 | \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. | |
4567 | \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} | |
4568 | \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4569 | \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4570 | \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4571 | \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4572 | \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4573 | \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4574 | \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4575 | \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry | |
4576 | \openin 1 \jobname.toc | |
4577 | \ifeof 1 \else | |
4578 | \input \jobname.toc | |
4579 | \fi | |
4580 | \closein 1 | |
4581 | \vfill \eject | |
4582 | \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect | |
4583 | \endgroup | |
4584 | \lastnegativepageno = \pageno | |
4585 | \global\pageno = \savepageno | |
718e3744 | 4586 | } |
4587 | \let\shortcontents = \summarycontents | |
4588 | ||
76b89b4a | 4589 | % Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. |
4590 | % The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. | |
4591 | % | |
4592 | \def\shortchaplabel#1{% | |
4593 | % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the | |
4594 | % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. | |
4595 | % But use \hss just in case. | |
4596 | % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after | |
4597 | % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) | |
afc1e2dd | 4598 | % |
76b89b4a | 4599 | % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange |
4600 | % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and | |
4601 | % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 | |
4602 | % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters | |
4603 | % there are before deciding ... | |
4604 | \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% | |
4605 | } | |
4606 | ||
718e3744 | 4607 | % These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. |
4608 | % The first argument is the chapter or section name. | |
4609 | % The last argument is the page number. | |
4610 | % The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... | |
4611 | ||
76b89b4a | 4612 | % Chapters, in the main contents. |
4613 | \def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
4614 | % | |
4615 | % Chapters, in the short toc. | |
4616 | % See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. | |
4617 | \def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% | |
4618 | \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% | |
718e3744 | 4619 | } |
4620 | ||
76b89b4a | 4621 | % Appendices, in the main contents. |
4622 | % Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. | |
afc1e2dd | 4623 | % |
76b89b4a | 4624 | \def\appendixbox#1{% |
4625 | % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. | |
4626 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% | |
4627 | \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} | |
4628 | % | |
4629 | \def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}} | |
718e3744 | 4630 | |
76b89b4a | 4631 | % Unnumbered chapters. |
4632 | \def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} | |
4633 | \def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} | |
718e3744 | 4634 | |
4635 | % Sections. | |
76b89b4a | 4636 | \def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4637 | \let\appsecentry=\numsecentry | |
4638 | \def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
718e3744 | 4639 | |
4640 | % Subsections. | |
76b89b4a | 4641 | \def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4642 | \let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry | |
4643 | \def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
718e3744 | 4644 | |
4645 | % And subsubsections. | |
76b89b4a | 4646 | \def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} |
4647 | \let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry | |
4648 | \def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} | |
718e3744 | 4649 | |
4650 | % This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. | |
76b89b4a | 4651 | % Same as \defaultparindent. |
4652 | \newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt | |
718e3744 | 4653 | |
4654 | % Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the | |
4655 | % page number. | |
4656 | % | |
4657 | % If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters | |
4658 | % if at all possible; hence the \penalty. | |
4659 | \def\dochapentry#1#2{% | |
4660 | \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip | |
4661 | \begingroup | |
4662 | \chapentryfonts | |
76b89b4a | 4663 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
718e3744 | 4664 | \endgroup |
4665 | \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip | |
4666 | } | |
4667 | ||
4668 | \def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4669 | \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent | |
76b89b4a | 4670 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
718e3744 | 4671 | \endgroup} |
4672 | ||
4673 | \def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4674 | \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent | |
76b89b4a | 4675 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
718e3744 | 4676 | \endgroup} |
4677 | ||
4678 | \def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup | |
4679 | \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent | |
76b89b4a | 4680 | \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% |
718e3744 | 4681 | \endgroup} |
4682 | ||
76b89b4a | 4683 | % We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. |
4684 | \let\tocentry = \entry | |
718e3744 | 4685 | |
4686 | % Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. | |
4687 | \def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} | |
4688 | ||
4689 | \def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
4690 | \def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} | |
4691 | ||
4692 | \def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} | |
4693 | \def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
76b89b4a | 4694 | \def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} |
4695 | \def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} | |
718e3744 | 4696 | |
4697 | ||
4698 | \message{environments,} | |
76b89b4a | 4699 | % @foo ... @end foo. |
718e3744 | 4700 | |
76b89b4a | 4701 | % @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
4702 | % | |
718e3744 | 4703 | % Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of |
4704 | % \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. | |
76b89b4a | 4705 | % |
718e3744 | 4706 | \def\point{$\star$} |
4707 | \def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} | |
4708 | \def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} | |
4709 | \def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} | |
4710 | \def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} | |
4711 | ||
76b89b4a | 4712 | % The @error{} command. |
718e3744 | 4713 | % Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
76b89b4a | 4714 | % |
4715 | \newbox\errorbox | |
4716 | % | |
718e3744 | 4717 | {\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. |
4718 | \dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules | |
4719 | % The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) | |
4720 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt} | |
76b89b4a | 4721 | % |
4722 | \setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil | |
718e3744 | 4723 | \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. |
4724 | \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. | |
76b89b4a | 4725 | \vbox{% |
718e3744 | 4726 | \hrule height\dimen2 |
4727 | \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. | |
4728 | \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. | |
4729 | \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. | |
4730 | \hrule height\dimen2} | |
4731 | \hfil} | |
76b89b4a | 4732 | % |
718e3744 | 4733 | \def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} |
4734 | ||
4735 | % @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily. | |
4736 | % One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. | |
4737 | % But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. | |
4738 | ||
76b89b4a | 4739 | \envdef\tex{% |
718e3744 | 4740 | \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
4741 | \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 | |
76b89b4a | 4742 | \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie |
718e3744 | 4743 | \catcode `\%=14 |
76b89b4a | 4744 | \catcode `\+=\other |
4745 | \catcode `\"=\other | |
4746 | \catcode `\|=\other | |
4747 | \catcode `\<=\other | |
4748 | \catcode `\>=\other | |
718e3744 | 4749 | \escapechar=`\\ |
4750 | % | |
4751 | \let\b=\ptexb | |
4752 | \let\bullet=\ptexbullet | |
4753 | \let\c=\ptexc | |
4754 | \let\,=\ptexcomma | |
4755 | \let\.=\ptexdot | |
4756 | \let\dots=\ptexdots | |
4757 | \let\equiv=\ptexequiv | |
4758 | \let\!=\ptexexclam | |
4759 | \let\i=\ptexi | |
76b89b4a | 4760 | \let\indent=\ptexindent |
4761 | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
718e3744 | 4762 | \let\{=\ptexlbrace |
4763 | \let\+=\tabalign | |
4764 | \let\}=\ptexrbrace | |
76b89b4a | 4765 | \let\/=\ptexslash |
718e3744 | 4766 | \let\*=\ptexstar |
4767 | \let\t=\ptext | |
4768 | % | |
4769 | \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% | |
4770 | \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% | |
4771 | \def\@{@}% | |
76b89b4a | 4772 | } |
4773 | % There is no need to define \Etex. | |
718e3744 | 4774 | |
76b89b4a | 4775 | % Define @lisp ... @end lisp. |
4776 | % @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, | |
4777 | % including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). | |
718e3744 | 4778 | |
4779 | % Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. | |
4780 | \newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in | |
4781 | ||
4782 | % This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other | |
4783 | % such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't | |
4784 | % have any width. | |
4785 | \def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} | |
4786 | ||
718e3744 | 4787 | % This space is always present above and below environments. |
4788 | \newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt | |
4789 | ||
4790 | % Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here | |
4791 | % to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip | |
4792 | % is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the | |
76b89b4a | 4793 | % start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. |
4794 | % | |
4795 | \def\aboveenvbreak{{% | |
afc1e2dd | 4796 | % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and |
4797 | % \sectionheading, q.v. | |
76b89b4a | 4798 | \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else |
4799 | \advance\envskipamount by \parskip | |
4800 | \endgraf | |
4801 | \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount | |
4802 | \removelastskip | |
4803 | % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak | |
4804 | % or better ... | |
4805 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi | |
4806 | \vskip\envskipamount | |
4807 | \fi | |
4808 | \fi | |
4809 | }} | |
718e3744 | 4810 | |
4811 | \let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak | |
4812 | ||
4813 | % \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. | |
4814 | \let\nonarrowing=\relax | |
4815 | ||
4816 | % @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around | |
4817 | % environment contents. | |
4818 | \font\circle=lcircle10 | |
4819 | \newdimen\circthick | |
4820 | \newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner | |
4821 | \newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip | |
4822 | \circthick=\fontdimen8\circle | |
4823 | % | |
4824 | \def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth | |
4825 | \def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} | |
4826 | \def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} | |
4827 | \def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} | |
4828 | \def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
4829 | \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr | |
4830 | \hskip\rskip}} | |
4831 | \def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip | |
4832 | \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr | |
4833 | \hskip\rskip}} | |
4834 | % | |
4835 | \newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip | |
4836 | ||
76b89b4a | 4837 | \envdef\cartouche{% |
4838 | \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. | |
4839 | \startsavinginserts | |
4840 | \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip | |
4841 | \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. | |
4842 | \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip | |
4843 | \advance\cartinner by-\rskip | |
4844 | \cartouter=\hsize | |
4845 | \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either | |
4846 | % side, and for 6pt waste from | |
4847 | % each corner char, and rule thickness | |
4848 | \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip | |
4849 | % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. | |
4850 | \let\nonarrowing=\comment | |
4851 | \vbox\bgroup | |
4852 | \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt | |
4853 | \carttop | |
4854 | \hbox\bgroup | |
4855 | \hskip\lskip | |
4856 | \vrule\kern3pt | |
4857 | \vbox\bgroup | |
4858 | \kern3pt | |
4859 | \hsize=\cartinner | |
4860 | \baselineskip=\normbskip | |
4861 | \lineskip=\normlskip | |
4862 | \parskip=\normpskip | |
4863 | \vskip -\parskip | |
4864 | \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group. | |
4865 | } | |
718e3744 | 4866 | \def\Ecartouche{% |
76b89b4a | 4867 | \ifhmode\par\fi |
4868 | \kern3pt | |
4869 | \egroup | |
4870 | \kern3pt\vrule | |
4871 | \hskip\rskip | |
4872 | \egroup | |
4873 | \cartbot | |
4874 | \egroup | |
4875 | \checkinserts | |
4876 | } | |
718e3744 | 4877 | |
4878 | ||
4879 | % This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, | |
4880 | % inside a group. | |
4881 | \def\nonfillstart{% | |
4882 | \aboveenvbreak | |
718e3744 | 4883 | \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy |
4884 | \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. | |
718e3744 | 4885 | \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines |
4886 | \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output | |
4887 | \parskip = 0pt | |
4888 | \parindent = 0pt | |
4889 | \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes | |
4890 | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing | |
4891 | % at next level down. | |
4892 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
4893 | \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
4894 | \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing | |
718e3744 | 4895 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 4896 | \let\exdent=\nofillexdent |
718e3744 | 4897 | } |
4898 | ||
76b89b4a | 4899 | % If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. |
4900 | % If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. | |
4901 | % This affects the following displayed environments: | |
4902 | % @example, @display, @format, @lisp | |
718e3744 | 4903 | % |
76b89b4a | 4904 | \def\smallword{small} |
4905 | \def\nosmallword{nosmall} | |
4906 | \let\SETdispenvsize\relax | |
4907 | \def\setnormaldispenv{% | |
4908 | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword | |
4909 | \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
4910 | \fi | |
4911 | } | |
4912 | \def\setsmalldispenv{% | |
4913 | \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword | |
4914 | \else | |
4915 | \smallexamplefonts \rm | |
4916 | \fi | |
4917 | } | |
718e3744 | 4918 | |
76b89b4a | 4919 | % We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. |
4920 | % Let's do it by one command: | |
4921 | \def\makedispenv #1#2{ | |
4922 | \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2} | |
4923 | \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2} | |
4924 | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
4925 | \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak | |
718e3744 | 4926 | } |
4927 | ||
76b89b4a | 4928 | % Define two synonyms: |
4929 | \def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{ | |
4930 | \makedispenv{#1}{#3} | |
4931 | \makedispenv{#2}{#3} | |
4932 | } | |
718e3744 | 4933 | |
76b89b4a | 4934 | % @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp. |
718e3744 | 4935 | % |
76b89b4a | 4936 | % @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. |
718e3744 | 4937 | % Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
718e3744 | 4938 | % |
76b89b4a | 4939 | \maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{% |
718e3744 | 4940 | \nonfillstart |
76b89b4a | 4941 | \tt |
4942 | \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. | |
4943 | \gobble % eat return | |
718e3744 | 4944 | } |
4945 | ||
76b89b4a | 4946 | % @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
718e3744 | 4947 | % |
76b89b4a | 4948 | \makedispenv {display}{% |
4949 | \nonfillstart | |
4950 | \gobble | |
718e3744 | 4951 | } |
4952 | ||
76b89b4a | 4953 | % @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
718e3744 | 4954 | % |
76b89b4a | 4955 | \makedispenv{format}{% |
4956 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
718e3744 | 4957 | \nonfillstart |
718e3744 | 4958 | \gobble |
4959 | } | |
4960 | ||
76b89b4a | 4961 | % @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. |
4962 | \envdef\flushleft{% | |
4963 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
4964 | \nonfillstart | |
4965 | \gobble | |
718e3744 | 4966 | } |
76b89b4a | 4967 | \let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak |
718e3744 | 4968 | |
4969 | % @flushright. | |
4970 | % | |
76b89b4a | 4971 | \envdef\flushright{% |
4972 | \let\nonarrowing = t% | |
718e3744 | 4973 | \nonfillstart |
718e3744 | 4974 | \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
4975 | \gobble | |
4976 | } | |
76b89b4a | 4977 | \let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak |
4978 | ||
718e3744 | 4979 | |
4980 | % @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) | |
76b89b4a | 4981 | % and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since |
4982 | % we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and | |
4983 | % \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. | |
718e3744 | 4984 | % |
76b89b4a | 4985 | \envdef\quotation{% |
718e3744 | 4986 | {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip |
718e3744 | 4987 | \parindent=0pt |
718e3744 | 4988 | % |
4989 | % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. | |
4990 | \ifx\nonarrowing\relax | |
4991 | \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing | |
4992 | \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing | |
4993 | \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing | |
4994 | \let\nonarrowing = \relax | |
4995 | \fi | |
76b89b4a | 4996 | \parsearg\quotationlabel |
718e3744 | 4997 | } |
4998 | ||
76b89b4a | 4999 | % We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're |
5000 | % doing normal filling. | |
afc1e2dd | 5001 | % |
76b89b4a | 5002 | \def\Equotation{% |
5003 | \par | |
5004 | \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else | |
5005 | % indent a bit. | |
5006 | \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% | |
5007 | \fi | |
5008 | {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% | |
5009 | } | |
718e3744 | 5010 | |
76b89b4a | 5011 | % If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. |
5012 | \def\quotationlabel#1{% | |
5013 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
5014 | \ifx\temp\empty \else | |
5015 | {\bf #1: }% | |
5016 | \fi | |
5017 | } | |
718e3744 | 5018 | |
718e3744 | 5019 | |
76b89b4a | 5020 | % LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} |
5021 | % If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, | |
5022 | % we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: | |
5023 | % `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org | |
718e3744 | 5024 | % |
76b89b4a | 5025 | % [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. |
718e3744 | 5026 | % |
76b89b4a | 5027 | % [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets |
5028 | % active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a | |
5029 | % verbatim line. | |
5030 | \def\dospecials{% | |
5031 | \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% | |
5032 | \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% | |
5033 | \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% | |
718e3744 | 5034 | } |
718e3744 | 5035 | % |
76b89b4a | 5036 | % [Knuth] p. 380 |
5037 | \def\uncatcodespecials{% | |
5038 | \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} | |
718e3744 | 5039 | % |
76b89b4a | 5040 | % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 |
5041 | % Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font | |
5042 | \begingroup | |
5043 | \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq} | |
5044 | \endgroup | |
718e3744 | 5045 | % |
76b89b4a | 5046 | % Setup for the @verb command. |
718e3744 | 5047 | % |
76b89b4a | 5048 | % Eight spaces for a tab |
5049 | \begingroup | |
5050 | \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5051 | \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} | |
5052 | \endgroup | |
5053 | % | |
5054 | \def\setupverb{% | |
5055 | \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
5056 | \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% | |
5057 | \catcode`\`=\active | |
5058 | \tabeightspaces | |
5059 | % Respect line breaks, | |
5060 | % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5061 | % make each space count | |
5062 | % must do in this order: | |
5063 | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
718e3744 | 5064 | } |
5065 | ||
76b89b4a | 5066 | % Setup for the @verbatim environment |
5067 | % | |
5068 | % Real tab expansion | |
5069 | \newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount | |
5070 | % | |
5071 | \def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup} | |
5072 | \begingroup | |
5073 | \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5074 | \gdef\tabexpand{% | |
5075 | \catcode`\^^I=\active | |
5076 | \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup | |
5077 | \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab | |
5078 | \divide\dimen0 by\tabw | |
5079 | \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw | |
5080 | \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw | |
5081 | \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox | |
5082 | }% | |
5083 | } | |
5084 | \endgroup | |
5085 | \def\setupverbatim{% | |
5086 | \nonfillstart | |
5087 | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | |
5088 | % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim | |
5089 | \tt | |
5090 | \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}% | |
5091 | \catcode`\`=\active | |
5092 | \tabexpand | |
5093 | % Respect line breaks, | |
5094 | % print special symbols as themselves, and | |
5095 | % make each space count | |
5096 | % must do in this order: | |
5097 | \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces | |
5098 | \everypar{\starttabbox}% | |
718e3744 | 5099 | } |
5100 | ||
76b89b4a | 5101 | % Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique |
5102 | % delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a | |
5103 | % right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: | |
5104 | % | |
5105 | % \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} | |
5106 | % | |
5107 | % [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} | |
5108 | \begingroup | |
5109 | \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other | |
5110 | \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] | |
5111 | \endgroup | |
5112 | % | |
5113 | \def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} | |
5114 | % | |
5115 | % | |
5116 | % Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that | |
5117 | % the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: | |
5118 | % | |
5119 | % \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} | |
5120 | % | |
5121 | % For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, | |
5122 | % because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': | |
5123 | % we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. | |
5124 | % | |
5125 | % Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] | |
5126 | % | |
5127 | \begingroup | |
5128 | \catcode`\ =\active | |
5129 | \obeylines % | |
5130 | % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end | |
5131 | % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank | |
5132 | % line in the output. | |
5133 | \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% | |
5134 | % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but | |
5135 | % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. | |
5136 | \endgroup | |
5137 | % | |
5138 | \envdef\verbatim{% | |
5139 | \setupverbatim\doverbatim | |
718e3744 | 5140 | } |
76b89b4a | 5141 | \let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak |
718e3744 | 5142 | |
718e3744 | 5143 | |
76b89b4a | 5144 | % @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. |
5145 | % | |
5146 | \def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} | |
5147 | % | |
5148 | \def\doverbatiminclude#1{% | |
5149 | {% | |
5150 | \makevalueexpandable | |
5151 | \setupverbatim | |
5152 | \input #1 | |
5153 | \afterenvbreak | |
5154 | }% | |
718e3744 | 5155 | } |
5156 | ||
76b89b4a | 5157 | % @copying ... @end copying. |
afc1e2dd | 5158 | % Save the text away for @insertcopying later. |
76b89b4a | 5159 | % |
5160 | % We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. | |
5161 | % Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the | |
5162 | % typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done | |
5163 | % beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source | |
5164 | % file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as | |
5165 | % possible is very desirable. | |
5166 | % | |
afc1e2dd | 5167 | \def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} |
5168 | \def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} | |
5169 | % | |
5170 | \def\insertcopying{% | |
5171 | \begingroup | |
5172 | \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page | |
5173 | \scanexp\copyingtext | |
5174 | \endgroup | |
718e3744 | 5175 | } |
5176 | ||
76b89b4a | 5177 | \message{defuns,} |
5178 | % @defun etc. | |
718e3744 | 5179 | |
76b89b4a | 5180 | \newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in |
5181 | \newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt | |
5182 | \newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt | |
718e3744 | 5183 | |
76b89b4a | 5184 | % Start the processing of @deffn: |
5185 | \def\startdefun{% | |
5186 | \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 | |
5187 | \medbreak | |
5188 | \else | |
5189 | % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, | |
5190 | % which is there to keep the function description together with its | |
5191 | % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a | |
afc1e2dd | 5192 | % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted |
5193 | % by \defargscommonending, instead of 10000, since the sectioning | |
5194 | % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow | |
5195 | % a break between a section heading and a defun. | |
5196 | % | |
76b89b4a | 5197 | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \fi |
5198 | % | |
5199 | % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. | |
5200 | % But do insert the glue. | |
5201 | \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint | |
5202 | \fi | |
5203 | % | |
5204 | \parindent=0in | |
5205 | \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent | |
5206 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
718e3744 | 5207 | } |
5208 | ||
76b89b4a | 5209 | \def\dodefunx#1{% |
5210 | % First, check whether we are in the right environment: | |
5211 | \checkenv#1% | |
5212 | % | |
5213 | % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. | |
5214 | % It's not a great place, though. | |
5215 | \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \fi | |
5216 | % | |
5217 | % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: | |
5218 | \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% | |
718e3744 | 5219 | } |
76b89b4a | 5220 | \def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} |
718e3744 | 5221 | |
76b89b4a | 5222 | % \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} |
5223 | % | |
5224 | \def\printdefunline#1#2{% | |
5225 | \begingroup | |
5226 | % call \deffnheader: | |
5227 | #1#2 \endheader | |
5228 | % common ending: | |
5229 | \interlinepenalty = 10000 | |
5230 | \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil | |
5231 | \endgraf | |
5232 | \nobreak\vskip -\parskip | |
5233 | \penalty 10002 % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx | |
5234 | % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, | |
5235 | % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. | |
5236 | \checkparencounts | |
5237 | \endgroup | |
718e3744 | 5238 | } |
5239 | ||
76b89b4a | 5240 | \def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} |
718e3744 | 5241 | |
76b89b4a | 5242 | % \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; |
5243 | % the only thing remainnig is to define \deffnheader. | |
718e3744 | 5244 | % |
76b89b4a | 5245 | \def\makedefun#1{% |
5246 | \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun | |
5247 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun | |
5248 | \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% | |
5249 | \temp | |
718e3744 | 5250 | } |
5251 | ||
76b89b4a | 5252 | % \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader |
718e3744 | 5253 | % |
76b89b4a | 5254 | % Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. |
5255 | % \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. | |
718e3744 | 5256 | % |
76b89b4a | 5257 | \def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% |
5258 | \envdef#1{% | |
5259 | \startdefun | |
5260 | \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% | |
5261 | }% | |
5262 | \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% | |
5263 | \def#3% | |
718e3744 | 5264 | } |
5265 | ||
76b89b4a | 5266 | %%% Untyped functions: |
718e3744 | 5267 | |
76b89b4a | 5268 | % @deffn category name args |
5269 | \makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} | |
718e3744 | 5270 | |
76b89b4a | 5271 | % @deffn category class name args |
5272 | \makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
718e3744 | 5273 | |
76b89b4a | 5274 | % \defopon {category on}class name args |
5275 | \def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
718e3744 | 5276 | |
76b89b4a | 5277 | % \deffngeneral {subind}category name args |
5278 | % | |
5279 | \def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% | |
5280 | % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. | |
5281 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% | |
5282 | \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% | |
718e3744 | 5283 | } |
5284 | ||
76b89b4a | 5285 | %%% Typed functions: |
718e3744 | 5286 | |
76b89b4a | 5287 | % @deftypefn category type name args |
5288 | \makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} | |
718e3744 | 5289 | |
76b89b4a | 5290 | % @deftypeop category class type name args |
5291 | \makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} | |
718e3744 | 5292 | |
76b89b4a | 5293 | % \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args |
5294 | \def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
718e3744 | 5295 | |
76b89b4a | 5296 | % \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args |
5297 | % | |
5298 | \def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
5299 | \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
5300 | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
5301 | } | |
718e3744 | 5302 | |
76b89b4a | 5303 | %%% Typed variables: |
718e3744 | 5304 | |
76b89b4a | 5305 | % @deftypevr category type var args |
5306 | \makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} | |
718e3744 | 5307 | |
76b89b4a | 5308 | % @deftypecv category class type var args |
5309 | \makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
718e3744 | 5310 | |
76b89b4a | 5311 | % \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args |
5312 | \def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } | |
718e3744 | 5313 | |
76b89b4a | 5314 | % \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args |
5315 | % | |
5316 | \def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% | |
5317 | \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% | |
5318 | \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% | |
718e3744 | 5319 | } |
5320 | ||
76b89b4a | 5321 | %%% Untyped variables: |
718e3744 | 5322 | |
76b89b4a | 5323 | % @defvr category var args |
5324 | \makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } | |
718e3744 | 5325 | |
76b89b4a | 5326 | % @defcv category class var args |
5327 | \makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} | |
718e3744 | 5328 | |
76b89b4a | 5329 | % \defcvof {category of}class var args |
5330 | \def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } | |
718e3744 | 5331 | |
76b89b4a | 5332 | %%% Type: |
5333 | % @deftp category name args | |
5334 | \makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% | |
5335 | \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% | |
5336 | \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% | |
5337 | } | |
718e3744 | 5338 | |
76b89b4a | 5339 | % Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: |
5340 | \makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
5341 | \makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } | |
5342 | \makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } | |
5343 | \makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } | |
5344 | \makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
5345 | \makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } | |
5346 | \makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } | |
5347 | \makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} | |
5348 | \makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} | |
5349 | \makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
5350 | \makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} | |
718e3744 | 5351 | |
76b89b4a | 5352 | % \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). |
5353 | % #1 is the category, such as "Function". | |
5354 | % #2 is the return type, if any. | |
5355 | % #3 is the function name. | |
afc1e2dd | 5356 | % |
76b89b4a | 5357 | % We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. |
5358 | % | |
5359 | \def\defname#1#2#3{% | |
5360 | % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... | |
5361 | \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent | |
5362 | % | |
5363 | % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps | |
5364 | % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line | |
5365 | % just below it. | |
5366 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
5367 | \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} | |
5368 | % | |
5369 | % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. | |
5370 | % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, | |
5371 | % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: | |
5372 | \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip | |
5373 | % The continuations: | |
5374 | \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent | |
5375 | % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.) | |
5376 | \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2 | |
5377 | % | |
5378 | % Put the type name to the right margin. | |
5379 | \noindent | |
5380 | \hbox to 0pt{% | |
5381 | \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize | |
5382 | % \hsize has to be shortened this way: | |
5383 | \kern\leftskip | |
5384 | % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. | |
5385 | }% | |
5386 | % | |
5387 | % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: | |
5388 | \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 | |
5389 | \exdentamount=\defbodyindent | |
5390 | {% | |
5391 | % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: | |
5392 | % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. | |
5393 | % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's | |
5394 | % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in | |
5395 | % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. | |
5396 | % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. | |
5397 | % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no | |
5398 | % one has made identifiers using them :). | |
5399 | \df \tt | |
5400 | \def\temp{#2}% return value type | |
5401 | \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi | |
5402 | #3% output function name | |
5403 | }% | |
5404 | {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm | |
5405 | % | |
5406 | \boldbrax | |
5407 | % arguments will be output next, if any. | |
5408 | } | |
718e3744 | 5409 | |
76b89b4a | 5410 | % Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using |
5411 | % tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in | |
5412 | % the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very | |
5413 | % distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. | |
afc1e2dd | 5414 | % |
76b89b4a | 5415 | \def\defunargs#1{% |
afc1e2dd | 5416 | % use sl by default (not ttsl), |
76b89b4a | 5417 | % tt for the names. |
5418 | \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 | |
5419 | % | |
5420 | % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we | |
5421 | % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that. | |
5422 | \let\var=\ttslanted | |
5423 | #1% | |
5424 | \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 | |
5425 | } | |
718e3744 | 5426 | |
76b89b4a | 5427 | % We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. |
5428 | % | |
5429 | \def\activeparens{% | |
5430 | \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active | |
5431 | \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active | |
5432 | \catcode`\&=\active | |
5433 | } | |
718e3744 | 5434 | |
76b89b4a | 5435 | % Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. |
5436 | \let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) | |
718e3744 | 5437 | |
76b89b4a | 5438 | % Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, |
5439 | % if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, | |
5440 | % so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. | |
5441 | { | |
5442 | \activeparens | |
5443 | \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen | |
5444 | \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack | |
5445 | \global\let& = \& | |
718e3744 | 5446 | |
76b89b4a | 5447 | \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} |
5448 | \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} | |
5449 | } | |
718e3744 | 5450 | |
76b89b4a | 5451 | \newcount\parencount |
718e3744 | 5452 | |
76b89b4a | 5453 | % If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
5454 | \newif\ifampseen | |
5455 | \def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} | |
5456 | ||
5457 | \def\parenfont{% | |
5458 | \ifampseen | |
5459 | % At the first level, print parens in roman, | |
5460 | % otherwise use the default font. | |
5461 | \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi | |
5462 | \else | |
5463 | % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than | |
5464 | % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . | |
5465 | \sf | |
5466 | \fi | |
5467 | } | |
5468 | \def\infirstlevel#1{% | |
5469 | \ifampseen | |
5470 | \ifnum\parencount=1 | |
5471 | #1% | |
5472 | \fi | |
5473 | \fi | |
5474 | } | |
5475 | \def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} | |
718e3744 | 5476 | |
76b89b4a | 5477 | \def\opnr{% |
5478 | \global\advance\parencount by 1 | |
5479 | {\parenfont(}% | |
5480 | \infirstlevel \bfafterword | |
5481 | } | |
5482 | \def\clnr{% | |
5483 | {\parenfont)}% | |
5484 | \infirstlevel \sl | |
5485 | \global\advance\parencount by -1 | |
5486 | } | |
718e3744 | 5487 | |
76b89b4a | 5488 | \newcount\brackcount |
5489 | \def\lbrb{% | |
5490 | \global\advance\brackcount by 1 | |
5491 | {\bf[}% | |
5492 | } | |
5493 | \def\rbrb{% | |
5494 | {\bf]}% | |
5495 | \global\advance\brackcount by -1 | |
5496 | } | |
718e3744 | 5497 | |
76b89b4a | 5498 | \def\checkparencounts{% |
5499 | \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi | |
5500 | \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi | |
5501 | } | |
5502 | \def\badparencount{% | |
5503 | \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}% | |
5504 | \global\parencount=0 | |
5505 | } | |
5506 | \def\badbrackcount{% | |
5507 | \errmessage{Unbalanced square braces in @def}% | |
5508 | \global\brackcount=0 | |
5509 | } | |
718e3744 | 5510 | |
5511 | ||
5512 | \message{macros,} | |
5513 | % @macro. | |
5514 | ||
5515 | % To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, | |
5516 | % which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. | |
5517 | \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined | |
76b89b4a | 5518 | \newwrite\macscribble |
5519 | \def\scantokens#1{% | |
afc1e2dd | 5520 | \toks0={#1}% |
76b89b4a | 5521 | \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp |
5522 | \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% | |
5523 | \immediate\closeout\macscribble | |
5524 | \input \jobname.tmp | |
5525 | } | |
718e3744 | 5526 | \fi |
5527 | ||
76b89b4a | 5528 | \def\scanmacro#1{% |
5529 | \begingroup | |
5530 | \newlinechar`\^^M | |
5531 | \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces | |
5532 | % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex | |
afc1e2dd | 5533 | % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active |
5534 | % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had | |
5535 | % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears | |
5536 | % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04 | |
5537 | \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@ | |
76b89b4a | 5538 | % ... and \example |
5539 | \spaceisspace | |
5540 | % | |
5541 | % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline. | |
5542 | % | |
5543 | % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX | |
5544 | % --kasal, 29nov03 | |
5545 | \scantokens{#1\endinput}% | |
5546 | \endgroup | |
5547 | } | |
5548 | ||
afc1e2dd | 5549 | \def\scanexp#1{% |
5550 | \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}% | |
5551 | \temp | |
5552 | } | |
5553 | ||
718e3744 | 5554 | \newcount\paramno % Count of parameters |
5555 | \newtoks\macname % Macro name | |
5556 | \newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? | |
5557 | \def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form | |
5558 | % \do\macro1\do\macro2... | |
5559 | ||
5560 | % Utility routines. | |
afc1e2dd | 5561 | % This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, |
5562 | % \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname | |
5563 | % (except of course we have to play expansion games). | |
5564 | % | |
718e3744 | 5565 | \def\cslet#1#2{% |
afc1e2dd | 5566 | \expandafter\let |
5567 | \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname | |
5568 | \csname#2\endcsname | |
5569 | } | |
718e3744 | 5570 | |
5571 | % Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. | |
5572 | % Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). | |
5573 | {\catcode`\@=11 | |
5574 | \gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} | |
5575 | \gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} | |
5576 | \gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} | |
5577 | \def\unbrace#1{#1} | |
5578 | \unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} | |
5579 | } | |
5580 | ||
5581 | % Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. | |
76b89b4a | 5582 | {\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% |
718e3744 | 5583 | \gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
5584 | \gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% | |
5585 | \gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% | |
5586 | } | |
5587 | ||
5588 | % Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where | |
5589 | % all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active | |
5590 | % (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. | |
5591 | ||
5592 | % It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is | |
5593 | % done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro | |
5594 | % body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. | |
5595 | ||
afc1e2dd | 5596 | \def\scanctxt{% |
5597 | \catcode`\"=\other | |
5598 | \catcode`\+=\other | |
5599 | \catcode`\<=\other | |
5600 | \catcode`\>=\other | |
5601 | \catcode`\@=\other | |
76b89b4a | 5602 | \catcode`\^=\other |
5603 | \catcode`\_=\other | |
5604 | \catcode`\|=\other | |
afc1e2dd | 5605 | \catcode`\~=\other |
5606 | } | |
5607 | ||
5608 | \def\scanargctxt{% | |
5609 | \scanctxt | |
5610 | \catcode`\\=\other | |
5611 | \catcode`\^^M=\other | |
5612 | } | |
5613 | ||
5614 | \def\macrobodyctxt{% | |
5615 | \scanctxt | |
76b89b4a | 5616 | \catcode`\{=\other |
5617 | \catcode`\}=\other | |
76b89b4a | 5618 | \catcode`\^^M=\other |
afc1e2dd | 5619 | \usembodybackslash |
5620 | } | |
718e3744 | 5621 | |
5622 | \def\macroargctxt{% | |
afc1e2dd | 5623 | \scanctxt |
5624 | \catcode`\\=\other | |
5625 | } | |
718e3744 | 5626 | |
5627 | % \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. | |
5628 | % It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N | |
5629 | % where N is the macro parameter number. | |
5630 | % We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so | |
5631 | % \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. | |
5632 | ||
5633 | {\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active | |
5634 | @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} | |
5635 | @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} | |
5636 | } | |
5637 | \expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} | |
5638 | ||
5639 | \def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
5640 | \def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} | |
5641 | ||
5642 | \def\macroxxx#1{% | |
5643 | \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist | |
5644 | \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments | |
5645 | \paramno=0% | |
5646 | \else | |
5647 | \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% | |
5648 | \fi | |
5649 | \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname | |
5650 | \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% | |
5651 | \else | |
5652 | \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax | |
76b89b4a | 5653 | \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi |
718e3744 | 5654 | \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
5655 | \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% | |
5656 | % Add the macroname to \macrolist | |
5657 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}% | |
5658 | \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0 | |
5659 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}% | |
5660 | \fi | |
5661 | \begingroup \macrobodyctxt | |
5662 | \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody | |
5663 | \else \expandafter\parsemacbody | |
5664 | \fi} | |
5665 | ||
76b89b4a | 5666 | \parseargdef\unmacro{% |
718e3744 | 5667 | \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname |
5668 | \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% | |
5669 | \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% | |
76b89b4a | 5670 | % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: |
718e3744 | 5671 | \begingroup |
76b89b4a | 5672 | \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax |
5673 | \let\do\unmacrodo | |
5674 | \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% | |
718e3744 | 5675 | \endgroup |
5676 | \else | |
5677 | \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% | |
5678 | \fi | |
5679 | } | |
5680 | ||
76b89b4a | 5681 | % Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any |
5682 | % macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. | |
5683 | % | |
5684 | \def\unmacrodo#1{% | |
5685 | \ifx#1\relax | |
5686 | % remove this | |
5687 | \else | |
5688 | \noexpand\do \noexpand #1% | |
5689 | \fi | |
5690 | } | |
5691 | ||
718e3744 | 5692 | % This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
5693 | % <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by | |
5694 | % an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. | |
5695 | \def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} | |
5696 | \def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} | |
5697 | \def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} | |
5698 | \def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} | |
5699 | ||
5700 | % Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist | |
5701 | % so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah | |
5702 | % in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. | |
5703 | % That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). | |
5704 | ||
5705 | % We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. | |
5706 | % The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something | |
5707 | % unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine | |
5708 | % it to # just before using the token list produced. | |
5709 | % | |
5710 | % The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before | |
5711 | % the macro is used. | |
5712 | ||
5713 | \def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% | |
5714 | \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} | |
5715 | \def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% | |
5716 | \if#1;\let\next=\relax | |
5717 | \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx | |
5718 | \advance\paramno by 1% | |
5719 | \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname | |
5720 | {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% | |
5721 | \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% | |
5722 | \fi\next} | |
5723 | ||
5724 | % These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. | |
5725 | % (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) | |
5726 | ||
5727 | \long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% | |
5728 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
5729 | \long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% | |
5730 | {\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% | |
5731 | ||
5732 | % This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and | |
5733 | % nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. | |
5734 | % Much magic with \expandafter here. | |
5735 | % \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file | |
5736 | % they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. | |
5737 | \def\defmacro{% | |
5738 | \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars | |
5739 | \ifrecursive | |
5740 | \ifcase\paramno | |
5741 | % 0 | |
5742 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
5743 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
5744 | \or % 1 | |
5745 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
5746 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
5747 | \noexpand\braceorline | |
5748 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
5749 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
5750 | \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
5751 | \else % many | |
5752 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
5753 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
5754 | \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
5755 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
5756 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
5757 | \expandafter\expandafter | |
5758 | \expandafter\xdef | |
5759 | \expandafter\expandafter | |
5760 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
5761 | \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% | |
5762 | \fi | |
5763 | \else | |
5764 | \ifcase\paramno | |
5765 | % 0 | |
5766 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
5767 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
5768 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
5769 | \or % 1 | |
5770 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
5771 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
5772 | \noexpand\braceorline | |
5773 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% | |
5774 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% | |
5775 | \egroup | |
5776 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
5777 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
5778 | \else % many | |
5779 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% | |
5780 | \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt | |
5781 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}% | |
5782 | \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% | |
5783 | \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% | |
5784 | \expandafter\expandafter | |
5785 | \expandafter\xdef | |
5786 | \expandafter\expandafter | |
5787 | \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname | |
5788 | \paramlist{% | |
5789 | \egroup | |
5790 | \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% | |
5791 | \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% | |
5792 | \fi | |
5793 | \fi} | |
5794 | ||
5795 | \def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} | |
5796 | ||
5797 | % \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a | |
5798 | % {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole | |
5799 | % line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence | |
5800 | % as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) | |
5801 | \def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} | |
5802 | \def\braceorlinexxx{% | |
5803 | \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else | |
5804 | \expandafter\parsearg | |
5805 | \fi \next} | |
5806 | ||
afc1e2dd | 5807 | % We want to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not |
718e3744 | 5808 | % expanded by \write. |
5809 | \def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}% | |
5810 | \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} | |
5811 | ||
afc1e2dd | 5812 | % For \indexnofonts, we need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the |
5813 | % arguments (if present). Of course this is not nearly correct, but it | |
5814 | % is the best we can do for now. makeinfo does not expand macros in the | |
5815 | % argument to @deffn, which ends up writing an index entry, and texindex | |
5816 | % isn't prepared for an index sort entry that starts with \. | |
5817 | % | |
5818 | % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them | |
5819 | % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that | |
5820 | % goes to end-of-line is not handled. | |
5821 | % | |
5822 | \def\emptyusermacros{\begingroup | |
5823 | \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\noexpand\asis}% | |
5824 | \edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next} | |
5825 | ||
718e3744 | 5826 | |
5827 | % @alias. | |
76b89b4a | 5828 | % We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal |
5829 | % sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing. | |
5830 | \def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} | |
5831 | \def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} | |
5832 | \def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% | |
5833 | {% | |
5834 | \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty | |
5835 | \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% | |
5836 | }% | |
5837 | \next | |
5838 | } | |
718e3744 | 5839 | |
5840 | ||
5841 | \message{cross references,} | |
76b89b4a | 5842 | |
718e3744 | 5843 | \newwrite\auxfile |
5844 | ||
5845 | \newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. | |
5846 | \newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. | |
5847 | ||
5848 | % @inforef is relatively simple. | |
5849 | \def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} | |
5850 | \def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, | |
5851 | node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} | |
5852 | ||
76b89b4a | 5853 | % @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in |
afc1e2dd | 5854 | % cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and |
5855 | % might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: | |
5856 | % @node foo , bar , ... | |
5857 | % We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. | |
5858 | % | |
5859 | \parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} | |
5860 | % | |
5861 | % also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: | |
5862 | % @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs | |
5863 | \def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} | |
5864 | \def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} | |
5865 | ||
718e3744 | 5866 | \let\nwnode=\node |
76b89b4a | 5867 | \let\lastnode=\empty |
5868 | ||
5869 | % Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the | |
5870 | % type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). | |
afc1e2dd | 5871 | % |
76b89b4a | 5872 | \def\donoderef#1{% |
5873 | \ifx\lastnode\empty\else | |
5874 | \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% | |
5875 | \global\let\lastnode=\empty | |
718e3744 | 5876 | \fi |
5877 | } | |
5878 | ||
718e3744 | 5879 | % @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. |
5880 | % | |
76b89b4a | 5881 | \newcount\savesfregister |
718e3744 | 5882 | % |
76b89b4a | 5883 | \def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} |
5884 | \def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} | |
5885 | \def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} | |
5886 | ||
5887 | % \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an | |
5888 | % anchor), which consists of three parts: | |
5889 | % 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \thissection, | |
5890 | % or the anchor name. | |
5891 | % 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or | |
5892 | % empty for anchors. | |
5893 | % 3) NAME-pg - the page number. | |
afc1e2dd | 5894 | % |
76b89b4a | 5895 | % This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of |
5896 | % floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: | |
5897 | % 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. | |
afc1e2dd | 5898 | % |
76b89b4a | 5899 | \def\setref#1#2{% |
5900 | \pdfmkdest{#1}% | |
5901 | \iflinks | |
5902 | {% | |
5903 | \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them | |
5904 | \turnoffactive | |
5905 | \otherbackslash | |
5906 | \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% | |
5907 | \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef | |
5908 | ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef | |
5909 | }% | |
5910 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\thissection}% | |
5911 | \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% | |
5912 | \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. | |
5913 | \writexrdef{pg}{\folio}% will be written later, during \shipout | |
5914 | }% | |
5915 | \fi | |
5916 | } | |
718e3744 | 5917 | |
5918 | % @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is | |
5919 | % the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed | |
5920 | % node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed | |
5921 | % manual. All but the node name can be omitted. | |
5922 | % | |
5923 | \def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
5924 | \def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
5925 | \def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} | |
5926 | \def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup | |
76b89b4a | 5927 | \unsepspaces |
718e3744 | 5928 | \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% |
76b89b4a | 5929 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% |
5930 | \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% | |
5931 | \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% | |
718e3744 | 5932 | \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
5933 | % No printed node name was explicitly given. | |
5934 | \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax | |
5935 | % Use the node name inside the square brackets. | |
76b89b4a | 5936 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
718e3744 | 5937 | \else |
5938 | % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside | |
5939 | % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. | |
5940 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
5941 | % It is in another manual, so we don't have it. | |
76b89b4a | 5942 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
718e3744 | 5943 | \else |
5944 | \ifhavexrefs | |
5945 | % We know the real title if we have the xref values. | |
76b89b4a | 5946 | \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
718e3744 | 5947 | \else |
5948 | % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. | |
76b89b4a | 5949 | \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% |
718e3744 | 5950 | \fi% |
5951 | \fi | |
5952 | \fi | |
5953 | \fi | |
5954 | % | |
76b89b4a | 5955 | % Make link in pdf output. |
5956 | \ifpdf | |
5957 | \leavevmode | |
5958 | \getfilename{#4}% | |
5959 | {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash | |
5960 | \ifnum\filenamelength>0 | |
5961 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
5962 | goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}% | |
5963 | \else | |
5964 | \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% | |
5965 | goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}% | |
5966 | \fi | |
5967 | }% | |
5968 | \linkcolor | |
5969 | \fi | |
5970 | % | |
5971 | % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" | |
5972 | % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the | |
5973 | % LABEL-title being set to a magic string. | |
5974 | {% | |
5975 | % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to | |
5976 | % include an _ in the xref name, etc. | |
5977 | \indexnofonts | |
5978 | \turnoffactive | |
5979 | \otherbackslash | |
5980 | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle | |
5981 | \csname XR#1-title\endcsname | |
5982 | }% | |
5983 | \iffloat\Xthisreftitle | |
5984 | % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, | |
5985 | % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". | |
5986 | \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt | |
5987 | \refx{#1-snt}% | |
5988 | \else | |
5989 | \printedrefname | |
5990 | \fi | |
5991 | % | |
5992 | % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append | |
afc1e2dd | 5993 | % "in MANUALNAME". |
76b89b4a | 5994 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
5995 | \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
5996 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 5997 | \else |
76b89b4a | 5998 | % node/anchor (non-float) references. |
afc1e2dd | 5999 | % |
76b89b4a | 6000 | % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not |
6001 | % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will | |
6002 | % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals | |
6003 | % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this | |
6004 | % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it | |
6005 | % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. | |
6006 | \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt | |
6007 | \putwordsection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% | |
6008 | \else | |
6009 | % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the | |
6010 | % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand | |
6011 | % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of | |
6012 | % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the | |
6013 | % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. | |
6014 | {\turnoffactive \otherbackslash | |
6015 | % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for | |
6016 | % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. | |
6017 | \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% | |
6018 | \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi | |
6019 | }% | |
6020 | % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden. | |
6021 | \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname | |
6022 | % | |
6023 | % But we always want a comma and a space: | |
6024 | ,\space | |
6025 | % | |
6026 | % output the `page 3'. | |
6027 | \turnoffactive \otherbackslash \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% | |
6028 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 6029 | \fi |
76b89b4a | 6030 | \endlink |
718e3744 | 6031 | \endgroup} |
6032 | ||
76b89b4a | 6033 | % This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref |
6034 | % output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, | |
6035 | % since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly | |
6036 | % one that Bob is working on :). | |
6037 | % | |
6038 | \def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} | |
718e3744 | 6039 | |
76b89b4a | 6040 | % Things referred to by \setref. |
718e3744 | 6041 | % |
76b89b4a | 6042 | \def\Ynothing{} |
6043 | \def\Yomitfromtoc{} | |
6044 | \def\Ynumbered{% | |
6045 | \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6046 | \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno | |
6047 | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6048 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno | |
6049 | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6050 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6051 | \else | |
6052 | \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6053 | \fi\fi\fi | |
6054 | } | |
6055 | \def\Yappendix{% | |
6056 | \ifnum\secno=0 | |
6057 | \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% | |
6058 | \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 | |
6059 | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno | |
6060 | \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 | |
6061 | \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno | |
6062 | \else | |
6063 | \putwordSection@tie | |
6064 | @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno | |
6065 | \fi\fi\fi | |
6066 | } | |
718e3744 | 6067 | |
6068 | % Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME. | |
6069 | % If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward. | |
76b89b4a | 6070 | % |
718e3744 | 6071 | \def\refx#1#2{% |
76b89b4a | 6072 | {% |
6073 | \indexnofonts | |
6074 | \otherbackslash | |
6075 | \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX | |
6076 | \csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6077 | }% | |
6078 | \ifx\thisrefX\relax | |
718e3744 | 6079 | % If not defined, say something at least. |
6080 | \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright | |
6081 | \iflinks | |
6082 | \ifhavexrefs | |
6083 | \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% | |
6084 | \else | |
6085 | \ifwarnedxrefs\else | |
6086 | \global\warnedxrefstrue | |
6087 | \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% | |
6088 | \fi | |
6089 | \fi | |
6090 | \fi | |
6091 | \else | |
6092 | % It's defined, so just use it. | |
76b89b4a | 6093 | \thisrefX |
718e3744 | 6094 | \fi |
6095 | #2% Output the suffix in any case. | |
6096 | } | |
6097 | ||
76b89b4a | 6098 | % This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's |
6099 | % just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid | |
6100 | % collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do. | |
718e3744 | 6101 | % |
76b89b4a | 6102 | \def\xrdef#1#2{% |
6103 | \expandafter\gdef\csname XR#1\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref value. | |
6104 | % | |
6105 | % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? | |
6106 | \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR#1\endcsname | |
6107 | % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. | |
6108 | \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist | |
6109 | \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname | |
afc1e2dd | 6110 | % |
76b89b4a | 6111 | % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? |
6112 | \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax | |
6113 | \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do | |
6114 | \else | |
6115 | % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. | |
6116 | \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% | |
6117 | \fi | |
6118 | % | |
6119 | % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, | |
6120 | % for later use in \listoffloats. | |
6121 | \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0{#1}}% | |
6122 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 6123 | } |
6124 | ||
6125 | % Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. | |
afc1e2dd | 6126 | % |
76b89b4a | 6127 | \def\tryauxfile{% |
6128 | \openin 1 \jobname.aux | |
6129 | \ifeof 1 \else | |
6130 | \readauxfile | |
6131 | \global\havexrefstrue | |
6132 | \fi | |
6133 | \closein 1 | |
6134 | } | |
6135 | ||
718e3744 | 6136 | \def\readauxfile{\begingroup |
6137 | \catcode`\^^@=\other | |
6138 | \catcode`\^^A=\other | |
6139 | \catcode`\^^B=\other | |
6140 | \catcode`\^^C=\other | |
6141 | \catcode`\^^D=\other | |
6142 | \catcode`\^^E=\other | |
6143 | \catcode`\^^F=\other | |
6144 | \catcode`\^^G=\other | |
6145 | \catcode`\^^H=\other | |
6146 | \catcode`\^^K=\other | |
6147 | \catcode`\^^L=\other | |
6148 | \catcode`\^^N=\other | |
6149 | \catcode`\^^P=\other | |
6150 | \catcode`\^^Q=\other | |
6151 | \catcode`\^^R=\other | |
6152 | \catcode`\^^S=\other | |
6153 | \catcode`\^^T=\other | |
6154 | \catcode`\^^U=\other | |
6155 | \catcode`\^^V=\other | |
6156 | \catcode`\^^W=\other | |
6157 | \catcode`\^^X=\other | |
6158 | \catcode`\^^Z=\other | |
6159 | \catcode`\^^[=\other | |
6160 | \catcode`\^^\=\other | |
6161 | \catcode`\^^]=\other | |
6162 | \catcode`\^^^=\other | |
6163 | \catcode`\^^_=\other | |
76b89b4a | 6164 | % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
718e3744 | 6165 | % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
6166 | % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, | |
6167 | % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ | |
6168 | % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat | |
6169 | % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first | |
6170 | % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could | |
6171 | % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. | |
6172 | % | |
6173 | % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: | |
6174 | % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter | |
6175 | % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. | |
6176 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6177 | \catcode`\^=\other |
6178 | % | |
6179 | % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... | |
718e3744 | 6180 | \catcode`\~=\other |
6181 | \catcode`\[=\other | |
6182 | \catcode`\]=\other | |
6183 | \catcode`\"=\other | |
6184 | \catcode`\_=\other | |
6185 | \catcode`\|=\other | |
6186 | \catcode`\<=\other | |
6187 | \catcode`\>=\other | |
6188 | \catcode`\$=\other | |
6189 | \catcode`\#=\other | |
6190 | \catcode`\&=\other | |
76b89b4a | 6191 | \catcode`\%=\other |
718e3744 | 6192 | \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
76b89b4a | 6193 | % |
6194 | % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ | |
6195 | % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than | |
6196 | % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ | |
6197 | % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* | |
6198 | % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that | |
6199 | % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for | |
6200 | % now. --karl, 15jan04. | |
6201 | \catcode`\\=\other | |
6202 | % | |
6203 | % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters. | |
718e3744 | 6204 | {% |
6205 | \count 1=128 | |
6206 | \def\loop{% | |
6207 | \catcode\count 1=\other | |
6208 | \advance\count 1 by 1 | |
6209 | \ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi | |
6210 | }% | |
6211 | }% | |
76b89b4a | 6212 | % |
6213 | % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. | |
718e3744 | 6214 | \catcode`\{=1 |
6215 | \catcode`\}=2 | |
76b89b4a | 6216 | \catcode`\@=0 |
718e3744 | 6217 | % |
76b89b4a | 6218 | \input \jobname.aux |
718e3744 | 6219 | \endgroup} |
6220 | ||
6221 | ||
76b89b4a | 6222 | \message{insertions,} |
6223 | % including footnotes. | |
718e3744 | 6224 | |
6225 | \newcount \footnoteno | |
6226 | ||
6227 | % The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is | |
6228 | % vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a | |
6229 | % pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is | |
6230 | % removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a | |
6231 | % space to prevent strange expansion errors.) | |
6232 | \def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } | |
6233 | ||
6234 | % @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. | |
6235 | \let\footnotestyle=\comment | |
6236 | ||
718e3744 | 6237 | {\catcode `\@=11 |
6238 | % | |
6239 | % Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. | |
6240 | \gdef\footnote{% | |
76b89b4a | 6241 | \let\indent=\ptexindent |
6242 | \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent | |
718e3744 | 6243 | \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne |
6244 | \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% | |
6245 | % | |
6246 | % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the | |
6247 | % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. | |
6248 | \let\@sf\empty | |
76b89b4a | 6249 | \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi |
718e3744 | 6250 | % |
6251 | % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. | |
6252 | \unskip | |
6253 | \thisfootno\@sf | |
76b89b4a | 6254 | \dofootnote |
718e3744 | 6255 | }% |
6256 | ||
6257 | % Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the | |
6258 | % footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. | |
6259 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6260 | % Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses |
6261 | % \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when | |
718e3744 | 6262 | % the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
6263 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6264 | \gdef\dofootnote{% |
6265 | \insert\footins\bgroup | |
718e3744 | 6266 | % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
6267 | % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. | |
6268 | % So reset some parameters. | |
76b89b4a | 6269 | \hsize=\pagewidth |
718e3744 | 6270 | \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty |
6271 | \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes | |
6272 | \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox | |
6273 | \floatingpenalty\@MM | |
6274 | \leftskip\z@skip | |
6275 | \rightskip\z@skip | |
6276 | \spaceskip\z@skip | |
6277 | \xspaceskip\z@skip | |
6278 | \parindent\defaultparindent | |
6279 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6280 | \smallfonts \rm |
6281 | % | |
6282 | % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears | |
6283 | % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use | |
6284 | % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote | |
6285 | % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). | |
6286 | \let\noindent = \relax | |
6287 | % | |
6288 | % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the | |
6289 | % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. | |
6290 | \everypar = {\hang}% | |
718e3744 | 6291 | \textindent{\thisfootno}% |
6292 | % | |
6293 | % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this | |
6294 | % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it | |
6295 | % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. | |
6296 | \footstrut | |
6297 | \futurelet\next\fo@t | |
6298 | } | |
718e3744 | 6299 | }%end \catcode `\@=11 |
6300 | ||
76b89b4a | 6301 | % In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create |
6302 | % the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion | |
6303 | % would be lost. | |
6304 | % Similarily, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote | |
6305 | % text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. | |
6306 | % And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. | |
6307 | ||
6308 | % Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. | |
6309 | % Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled | |
6310 | % out prematurely. | |
718e3744 | 6311 | % |
76b89b4a | 6312 | \def\startsavinginserts{% |
6313 | \ifx \insert\ptexinsert | |
6314 | \let\insert\saveinsert | |
6315 | \else | |
6316 | \let\checkinserts\relax | |
6317 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 6318 | } |
6319 | ||
76b89b4a | 6320 | % This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and |
6321 | % \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. | |
718e3744 | 6322 | % |
76b89b4a | 6323 | \def\saveinsert#1{% |
6324 | \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
6325 | \afterassignment\next | |
6326 | % swallow the left brace | |
6327 | \let\temp = | |
718e3744 | 6328 | } |
76b89b4a | 6329 | \def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} |
6330 | \def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} | |
6331 | ||
6332 | \def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} | |
6333 | ||
6334 | \def\placesaveins#1{% | |
6335 | \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname | |
6336 | {\box#1}% | |
6337 | } | |
6338 | ||
6339 | % eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: | |
6340 | { | |
6341 | \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) | |
6342 | \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} | |
6343 | } | |
6344 | ||
6345 | % initialization: | |
6346 | \def\newsaveins #1{% | |
6347 | \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% | |
6348 | \next | |
6349 | } | |
6350 | \def\newsaveinsX #1{% | |
6351 | \csname newbox\endcsname #1% | |
6352 | \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts | |
6353 | \checksaveins #1}% | |
6354 | } | |
6355 | ||
6356 | % initialize: | |
6357 | \let\checkinserts\empty | |
6358 | \newsaveins\footins | |
6359 | \newsaveins\margin | |
718e3744 | 6360 | |
718e3744 | 6361 | |
6362 | % @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. | |
6363 | % If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. | |
6364 | % | |
6365 | % Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image | |
6366 | % time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get | |
6367 | % undone and the next image would fail. | |
6368 | \openin 1 = epsf.tex | |
6369 | \ifeof 1 \else | |
76b89b4a | 6370 | % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in |
6371 | % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). | |
718e3744 | 6372 | \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
6373 | \input epsf.tex | |
6374 | \fi | |
76b89b4a | 6375 | \closein 1 |
718e3744 | 6376 | % |
76b89b4a | 6377 | % We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. |
718e3744 | 6378 | \newif\ifwarnednoepsf |
6379 | \newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to | |
6380 | work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get | |
6381 | it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} | |
6382 | % | |
718e3744 | 6383 | \def\image#1{% |
76b89b4a | 6384 | \ifx\epsfbox\undefined |
6385 | \ifwarnednoepsf \else | |
6386 | \errhelp = \noepsfhelp | |
6387 | \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% | |
6388 | \global\warnednoepsftrue | |
718e3744 | 6389 | \fi |
6390 | \else | |
76b89b4a | 6391 | \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish |
718e3744 | 6392 | \fi |
6393 | } | |
6394 | % | |
6395 | % Arguments to @image: | |
6396 | % #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. | |
6397 | % #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. | |
76b89b4a | 6398 | % #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. |
6399 | % #5 is (ignored optional) extension. | |
6400 | % #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. | |
6401 | \newif\ifimagevmode | |
6402 | \def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup | |
6403 | \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example | |
6404 | \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names | |
718e3744 | 6405 | % If the image is by itself, center it. |
6406 | \ifvmode | |
76b89b4a | 6407 | \imagevmodetrue |
6408 | \nobreak\bigskip | |
6409 | % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert | |
6410 | % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space | |
6411 | % above and below. | |
6412 | \nobreak\vskip\parskip | |
718e3744 | 6413 | \nobreak |
76b89b4a | 6414 | \line\bgroup\hss |
6415 | \fi | |
6416 | % | |
6417 | % Output the image. | |
6418 | \ifpdf | |
6419 | \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% | |
718e3744 | 6420 | \else |
76b89b4a | 6421 | % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. |
6422 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi | |
6423 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi | |
718e3744 | 6424 | \epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
6425 | \fi | |
76b89b4a | 6426 | % |
6427 | \ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image | |
6428 | \endgroup} | |
6429 | ||
6430 | ||
afc1e2dd | 6431 | % @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, |
6432 | % etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the | |
6433 | % float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. | |
6434 | % | |
6435 | \envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} | |
6436 | ||
6437 | % There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. | |
6438 | \def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} | |
76b89b4a | 6439 | |
6440 | % #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically | |
6441 | % "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, | |
6442 | % this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. | |
afc1e2dd | 6443 | % |
76b89b4a | 6444 | % #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to |
6445 | % be referable. | |
afc1e2dd | 6446 | % |
76b89b4a | 6447 | % #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It |
6448 | % will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). | |
afc1e2dd | 6449 | % |
76b89b4a | 6450 | % We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each |
6451 | % chapter-level command. | |
6452 | \let\resetallfloatnos=\empty | |
6453 | % | |
6454 | \def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% | |
6455 | \let\thiscaption=\empty | |
6456 | \let\thisshortcaption=\empty | |
6457 | % | |
6458 | % don't lose footnotes inside @float. | |
afc1e2dd | 6459 | % |
6460 | % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | |
6461 | % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
6462 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6463 | \startsavinginserts |
6464 | % | |
6465 | % We can't be used inside a paragraph. | |
6466 | \par | |
6467 | % | |
6468 | \vtop\bgroup | |
6469 | \def\floattype{#1}% | |
6470 | \def\floatlabel{#2}% | |
6471 | \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. | |
6472 | % | |
6473 | \ifx\floattype\empty | |
6474 | \let\safefloattype=\empty | |
6475 | \else | |
6476 | {% | |
6477 | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
6478 | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
6479 | \indexnofonts | |
6480 | \turnoffactive | |
6481 | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
6482 | }% | |
6483 | \fi | |
6484 | % | |
6485 | % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. | |
6486 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6487 | % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, | |
6488 | % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) | |
afc1e2dd | 6489 | % |
76b89b4a | 6490 | \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname |
6491 | \global\advance\floatno by 1 | |
6492 | % | |
6493 | {% | |
6494 | % This magic value for \thissection is output by \setref as the | |
6495 | % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float | |
6496 | % labels (which have a completely different output format) from | |
6497 | % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the | |
6498 | % lists of floats. | |
afc1e2dd | 6499 | % |
76b89b4a | 6500 | \edef\thissection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% |
6501 | \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% | |
6502 | }% | |
6503 | \fi | |
6504 | % | |
6505 | % start with \parskip glue, I guess. | |
6506 | \vskip\parskip | |
6507 | % | |
6508 | % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. | |
6509 | \restorefirstparagraphindent | |
6510 | } | |
6511 | ||
6512 | % we have these possibilities: | |
6513 | % @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap | |
6514 | % @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 | |
6515 | % @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap | |
6516 | % @float Foo & no caption: Foo | |
6517 | % @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap | |
6518 | % @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 | |
6519 | % @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap | |
6520 | % @float & no caption: | |
6521 | % | |
6522 | \def\Efloat{% | |
6523 | \let\floatident = \empty | |
6524 | % | |
6525 | % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. | |
6526 | \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi | |
6527 | % | |
6528 | % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. | |
6529 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6530 | \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. | |
6531 | \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% | |
6532 | \fi | |
6533 | % the number. | |
6534 | \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% | |
6535 | \fi | |
6536 | % | |
6537 | % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in | |
6538 | % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. | |
6539 | \let\captionline = \floatident | |
6540 | % | |
6541 | \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else | |
6542 | \ifx\floatident\empty \else | |
6543 | \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between | |
6544 | \fi | |
6545 | % | |
6546 | % caption text. | |
afc1e2dd | 6547 | \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% |
76b89b4a | 6548 | \fi |
6549 | % | |
6550 | % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. | |
6551 | % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. | |
6552 | \ifx\captionline\empty \else | |
6553 | \vskip.5\parskip | |
6554 | \captionline | |
afc1e2dd | 6555 | % |
6556 | % Space below caption. | |
6557 | \vskip\parskip | |
76b89b4a | 6558 | \fi |
6559 | % | |
6560 | % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this | |
6561 | % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. | |
6562 | \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else | |
6563 | % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as | |
6564 | % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short | |
6565 | % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. | |
6566 | {% | |
6567 | \atdummies \turnoffactive \otherbackslash | |
afc1e2dd | 6568 | % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M |
6569 | % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so | |
6570 | % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file. | |
6571 | \scanexp{% | |
6572 | \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{% | |
6573 | \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty | |
6574 | \thiscaption | |
6575 | \else | |
6576 | \thisshortcaption | |
6577 | \fi | |
6578 | }% | |
6579 | }% | |
6580 | \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident | |
6581 | \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% | |
76b89b4a | 6582 | }% |
6583 | \fi | |
76b89b4a | 6584 | \egroup % end of \vtop |
afc1e2dd | 6585 | % |
6586 | % place the captured inserts | |
6587 | % | |
6588 | % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an | |
6589 | % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 | |
6590 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6591 | \checkinserts |
6592 | } | |
6593 | ||
6594 | % Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. | |
afc1e2dd | 6595 | % |
76b89b4a | 6596 | \def\appendtomacro#1#2{% |
afc1e2dd | 6597 | \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% |
76b89b4a | 6598 | } |
6599 | ||
afc1e2dd | 6600 | % @caption, @shortcaption |
6601 | % | |
6602 | \def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} | |
6603 | \def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} | |
6604 | \def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} | |
6605 | \def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} | |
76b89b4a | 6606 | |
6607 | % The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are | |
6608 | % going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. | |
6609 | \def\getfloatno#1{% | |
6610 | \ifx#1\relax | |
6611 | % Haven't seen this figure type before. | |
6612 | \csname newcount\endcsname #1% | |
6613 | % | |
6614 | % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. | |
6615 | \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos | |
6616 | \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% | |
6617 | \fi | |
6618 | \let\floatno#1% | |
6619 | } | |
6620 | ||
6621 | % \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref | |
6622 | % to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we | |
6623 | % first read the @float command. | |
afc1e2dd | 6624 | % |
76b89b4a | 6625 | \def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% |
6626 | ||
6627 | % Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can | |
6628 | % distinguish floats from other xref types. | |
6629 | \def\floatmagic{!!float!!} | |
6630 | ||
6631 | % #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional | |
6632 | % which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic | |
6633 | % \thissection value which we \setref above. | |
afc1e2dd | 6634 | % |
76b89b4a | 6635 | \def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} |
6636 | % | |
6637 | % #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the | |
6638 | % (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. | |
afc1e2dd | 6639 | % |
76b89b4a | 6640 | \def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% |
6641 | \def\temp{#1}% | |
6642 | \def\iffloattype{#2}% | |
6643 | \ifx\temp\floatmagic | |
6644 | } | |
6645 | ||
6646 | % @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. | |
afc1e2dd | 6647 | % |
76b89b4a | 6648 | \parseargdef\listoffloats{% |
6649 | \def\floattype{#1}% floattype | |
6650 | {% | |
6651 | % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, | |
6652 | % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. | |
6653 | \indexnofonts | |
6654 | \turnoffactive | |
6655 | \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% | |
6656 | }% | |
6657 | % | |
6658 | % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. | |
6659 | \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax | |
6660 | \ifhavexrefs | |
6661 | % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. | |
6662 | \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% | |
6663 | \fi | |
6664 | \else | |
6665 | \begingroup | |
6666 | \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc | |
6667 | \let\do=\listoffloatsdo | |
6668 | \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname | |
6669 | \endgroup | |
6670 | \fi | |
718e3744 | 6671 | } |
6672 | ||
76b89b4a | 6673 | % This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the |
6674 | % xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the | |
6675 | % aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which | |
6676 | % has the text we're supposed to typeset here. | |
afc1e2dd | 6677 | % |
76b89b4a | 6678 | % Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since |
6679 | % they won't appear in the aux file). | |
afc1e2dd | 6680 | % |
76b89b4a | 6681 | \def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} |
6682 | \def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% | |
6683 | % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just | |
6684 | % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the | |
6685 | % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link | |
6686 | % in pdf output. | |
6687 | \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% | |
6688 | % | |
6689 | % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. | |
6690 | \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% | |
6691 | \writeentry | |
6692 | }} | |
718e3744 | 6693 | |
6694 | \message{localization,} | |
76b89b4a | 6695 | % and i18n. |
718e3744 | 6696 | |
6697 | % @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after | |
6698 | % @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything | |
6699 | % properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation. | |
6700 | % It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here. | |
6701 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6702 | \parseargdef\documentlanguage{% |
718e3744 | 6703 | \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. |
76b89b4a | 6704 | % Read the file if it exists. |
6705 | \openin 1 txi-#1.tex | |
6706 | \ifeof 1 | |
6707 | \errhelp = \nolanghelp | |
6708 | \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% | |
6709 | \else | |
6710 | \input txi-#1.tex | |
6711 | \fi | |
6712 | \closein 1 | |
718e3744 | 6713 | \endgroup |
6714 | } | |
6715 | \newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or | |
6716 | is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory | |
6717 | should work if nowhere else does.} | |
6718 | ||
6719 | ||
6720 | % @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most | |
6721 | % likely, but for now just recognize it. | |
6722 | \let\documentencoding = \comment | |
6723 | ||
6724 | ||
6725 | % Page size parameters. | |
6726 | % | |
6727 | \newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt | |
6728 | ||
6729 | \chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt | |
6730 | \secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt | |
6731 | \subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt | |
6732 | ||
6733 | % Prevent underfull vbox error messages. | |
6734 | \vbadness = 10000 | |
6735 | ||
6736 | % Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. | |
6737 | \hbadness = 2000 | |
6738 | ||
6739 | % Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. | |
6740 | \widowpenalty=10000 | |
6741 | \clubpenalty=10000 | |
6742 | ||
6743 | % Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're | |
6744 | % using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of | |
6745 | % stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on | |
6746 | % \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. | |
6747 | % | |
6748 | \def\setemergencystretch{% | |
6749 | \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined | |
6750 | % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. | |
6751 | \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% | |
6752 | \else | |
76b89b4a | 6753 | \emergencystretch = .15\hsize |
718e3744 | 6754 | \fi |
6755 | } | |
6756 | ||
6757 | % Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; | |
76b89b4a | 6758 | % 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 7) physical page height; 8) |
6759 | % physical page width. | |
6760 | % | |
6761 | % We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define | |
6762 | % \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. | |
718e3744 | 6763 | % |
76b89b4a | 6764 | \def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% |
718e3744 | 6765 | \voffset = #3\relax |
6766 | \topskip = #6\relax | |
6767 | \splittopskip = \topskip | |
6768 | % | |
6769 | \vsize = #1\relax | |
6770 | \advance\vsize by \topskip | |
6771 | \outervsize = \vsize | |
6772 | \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin | |
6773 | \pageheight = \vsize | |
6774 | % | |
6775 | \hsize = #2\relax | |
6776 | \outerhsize = \hsize | |
6777 | \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in | |
6778 | \pagewidth = \hsize | |
6779 | % | |
6780 | \normaloffset = #4\relax | |
6781 | \bindingoffset = #5\relax | |
6782 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6783 | \ifpdf |
6784 | \pdfpageheight #7\relax | |
6785 | \pdfpagewidth #8\relax | |
6786 | \fi | |
6787 | % | |
6788 | \setleading{\textleading} | |
6789 | % | |
718e3744 | 6790 | \parindent = \defaultparindent |
6791 | \setemergencystretch | |
6792 | } | |
6793 | ||
6794 | % @letterpaper (the default). | |
6795 | \def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
6796 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
76b89b4a | 6797 | \textleading = 13.2pt |
718e3744 | 6798 | % |
6799 | % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. | |
76b89b4a | 6800 | \internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}% |
6801 | {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
6802 | {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% | |
6803 | {11in}{8.5in}% | |
718e3744 | 6804 | }} |
6805 | ||
6806 | % Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. | |
6807 | \def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
6808 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt | |
76b89b4a | 6809 | \textleading = 12pt |
718e3744 | 6810 | % |
76b89b4a | 6811 | \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% |
6812 | {\voffset}{.25in}% | |
6813 | {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% | |
6814 | {9.25in}{7in}% | |
718e3744 | 6815 | % |
6816 | \lispnarrowing = 0.3in | |
6817 | \tolerance = 700 | |
6818 | \hfuzz = 1pt | |
6819 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
718e3744 | 6820 | \defbodyindent = .5cm |
718e3744 | 6821 | }} |
6822 | ||
6823 | % Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. | |
6824 | \def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
718e3744 | 6825 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
76b89b4a | 6826 | \textleading = 13.2pt |
718e3744 | 6827 | % |
76b89b4a | 6828 | % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 |
6829 | % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. | |
6830 | % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust | |
6831 | % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then | |
6832 | % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in | |
6833 | % your texinfo source file like this: | |
6834 | % @tex | |
6835 | % \global\normaloffset = -6mm | |
6836 | % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm | |
6837 | % @end tex | |
6838 | \internalpagesizes{51\baselineskip}{160mm} | |
6839 | {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
6840 | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
6841 | {297mm}{210mm}% | |
718e3744 | 6842 | % |
6843 | \tolerance = 700 | |
6844 | \hfuzz = 1pt | |
76b89b4a | 6845 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
6846 | \defbodyindent = 5mm | |
718e3744 | 6847 | }} |
6848 | ||
76b89b4a | 6849 | % Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. |
6850 | % From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. | |
6851 | % He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. | |
6852 | \def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
6853 | \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt | |
6854 | \textleading = 12.5pt | |
718e3744 | 6855 | % |
76b89b4a | 6856 | \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% |
6857 | {\voffset}{\hoffset}% | |
6858 | {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% | |
6859 | {210mm}{148mm}% | |
6860 | % | |
6861 | \lispnarrowing = 0.2in | |
6862 | \tolerance = 800 | |
6863 | \hfuzz = 1.2pt | |
6864 | \contentsrightmargin = 0pt | |
6865 | \defbodyindent = 2mm | |
6866 | \tableindent = 12mm | |
6867 | }} | |
6868 | ||
6869 | % A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. | |
6870 | \def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
718e3744 | 6871 | \afourpaper |
76b89b4a | 6872 | \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% |
6873 | {\voffset}{4.6mm}% | |
6874 | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
6875 | {297mm}{210mm}% | |
718e3744 | 6876 | % |
76b89b4a | 6877 | % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. |
718e3744 | 6878 | \globaldefs = 0 |
6879 | }} | |
6880 | ||
76b89b4a | 6881 | % Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. |
6882 | \def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 | |
718e3744 | 6883 | \afourpaper |
76b89b4a | 6884 | \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% |
6885 | {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% | |
6886 | {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% | |
6887 | {297mm}{210mm}% | |
718e3744 | 6888 | \globaldefs = 0 |
76b89b4a | 6889 | }} |
718e3744 | 6890 | |
6891 | % @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] | |
6892 | % Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, | |
6893 | % and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. | |
6894 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6895 | \parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
718e3744 | 6896 | \def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
6897 | \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi | |
6898 | \globaldefs = 1 | |
6899 | % | |
6900 | \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt | |
76b89b4a | 6901 | \setleading{\textleading}% |
718e3744 | 6902 | % |
76b89b4a | 6903 | \dimen0 = #1 |
6904 | \advance\dimen0 by \voffset | |
6905 | % | |
6906 | \dimen2 = \hsize | |
6907 | \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset | |
6908 | % | |
6909 | \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% | |
6910 | {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% | |
6911 | {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% | |
6912 | {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% | |
718e3744 | 6913 | }} |
6914 | ||
6915 | % Set default to letter. | |
6916 | % | |
6917 | \letterpaper | |
6918 | ||
76b89b4a | 6919 | |
718e3744 | 6920 | \message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
6921 | ||
6922 | % Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. | |
6923 | \catcode`\"=\other | |
6924 | \catcode`\~=\other | |
6925 | \catcode`\^=\other | |
6926 | \catcode`\_=\other | |
6927 | \catcode`\|=\other | |
6928 | \catcode`\<=\other | |
6929 | \catcode`\>=\other | |
6930 | \catcode`\+=\other | |
76b89b4a | 6931 | \catcode`\$=\other |
718e3744 | 6932 | \def\normaldoublequote{"} |
6933 | \def\normaltilde{~} | |
6934 | \def\normalcaret{^} | |
6935 | \def\normalunderscore{_} | |
6936 | \def\normalverticalbar{|} | |
6937 | \def\normalless{<} | |
6938 | \def\normalgreater{>} | |
6939 | \def\normalplus{+} | |
76b89b4a | 6940 | \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix |
718e3744 | 6941 | |
76b89b4a | 6942 | % This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt |
6943 | % (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, | |
718e3744 | 6944 | % where something hairier probably needs to be done. |
6945 | % | |
6946 | % #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print | |
6947 | % otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero | |
6948 | % interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all | |
6949 | % typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. | |
6950 | % | |
76b89b4a | 6951 | \def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} |
6952 | ||
6953 | % Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches | |
6954 | % non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from | |
6955 | % italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway | |
6956 | % this is not a problem. | |
6957 | \def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} | |
718e3744 | 6958 | |
6959 | % Turn off all special characters except @ | |
6960 | % (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary). | |
6961 | % Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can | |
6962 | % use math or other variants that look better in normal text. | |
6963 | ||
6964 | \catcode`\"=\active | |
6965 | \def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} | |
6966 | \let"=\activedoublequote | |
6967 | \catcode`\~=\active | |
6968 | \def~{{\tt\char126}} | |
6969 | \chardef\hat=`\^ | |
6970 | \catcode`\^=\active | |
6971 | \def^{{\tt \hat}} | |
6972 | ||
6973 | \catcode`\_=\active | |
6974 | \def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} | |
6975 | % Subroutine for the previous macro. | |
76b89b4a | 6976 | \def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } |
718e3744 | 6977 | |
6978 | \catcode`\|=\active | |
6979 | \def|{{\tt\char124}} | |
6980 | \chardef \less=`\< | |
6981 | \catcode`\<=\active | |
6982 | \def<{{\tt \less}} | |
6983 | \chardef \gtr=`\> | |
6984 | \catcode`\>=\active | |
6985 | \def>{{\tt \gtr}} | |
6986 | \catcode`\+=\active | |
6987 | \def+{{\tt \char 43}} | |
76b89b4a | 6988 | \catcode`\$=\active |
6989 | \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix | |
718e3744 | 6990 | |
6991 | % If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file | |
6992 | % name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. | |
6993 | % So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. | |
6994 | % \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. | |
6995 | \def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} | |
6996 | ||
6997 | \catcode`\@=0 | |
6998 | ||
76b89b4a | 6999 | % \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, |
7000 | % as in \char`\\. | |
7001 | \global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ | |
7002 | \global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work | |
718e3744 | 7003 | |
76b89b4a | 7004 | % \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. |
7005 | % \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with | |
7006 | % catcode other. | |
718e3744 | 7007 | {\catcode`\\=\active |
76b89b4a | 7008 | @gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} |
7009 | @gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} | |
7010 | } | |
718e3744 | 7011 | |
76b89b4a | 7012 | % \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other. |
7013 | {\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\}} | |
718e3744 | 7014 | |
76b89b4a | 7015 | % \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font. |
7016 | \def\normalbackslash{{\tt\backslashcurfont}} | |
718e3744 | 7017 | |
718e3744 | 7018 | \catcode`\\=\active |
7019 | ||
7020 | % Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters | |
7021 | % even after parsing them. | |
76b89b4a | 7022 | @def@turnoffactive{% |
7023 | @let"=@normaldoublequote | |
7024 | @let\=@realbackslash | |
7025 | @let~=@normaltilde | |
7026 | @let^=@normalcaret | |
7027 | @let_=@normalunderscore | |
7028 | @let|=@normalverticalbar | |
7029 | @let<=@normalless | |
7030 | @let>=@normalgreater | |
7031 | @let+=@normalplus | |
7032 | @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix | |
7033 | @unsepspaces | |
7034 | } | |
7035 | ||
7036 | % Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of | |
7037 | % the literal character `\'. (Thus, \ is not expandable when this is in | |
7038 | % effect.) | |
7039 | % | |
7040 | @def@normalturnoffactive{@turnoffactive @let\=@normalbackslash} | |
718e3744 | 7041 | |
7042 | % Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. | |
7043 | % This is canceled by @fixbackslash. | |
7044 | @otherifyactive | |
7045 | ||
7046 | % If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. | |
7047 | % That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing | |
7048 | % a backslash. | |
7049 | % | |
7050 | @gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash} | |
7051 | @global@let\ = @eatinput | |
7052 | ||
7053 | % On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then | |
7054 | % the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix | |
7055 | % that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. | |
7056 | % Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input | |
7057 | % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. | |
7058 | % | |
76b89b4a | 7059 | @gdef@fixbackslash{% |
7060 | @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi | |
7061 | @catcode`+=@active | |
7062 | @catcode`@_=@active | |
7063 | } | |
718e3744 | 7064 | |
76b89b4a | 7065 | % Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. |
7066 | @escapechar = `@@ | |
7067 | ||
7068 | % These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. | |
7069 | @catcode`@& = @other | |
7070 | @catcode`@# = @other | |
7071 | @catcode`@% = @other | |
718e3744 | 7072 | |
718e3744 | 7073 | |
7074 | @c Local variables: | |
7075 | @c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) | |
7076 | @c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" | |
7077 | @c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" | |
76b89b4a | 7078 | @c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" |
718e3744 | 7079 | @c time-stamp-end: "}" |
7080 | @c End: | |
76b89b4a | 7081 | |
7082 | @c vim:sw=2: | |
7083 | ||
7084 | @ignore | |
7085 | arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115 | |
7086 | @end ignore |